Home

Kodak DX6440 Digital Camera User Manual

1. OTRACKS O 2 o1 O NOME fi GOYAMAHA BACK NE XT OHOLD man OMONO O EL TA OOO VOICE pr TOPO STARTSTOF STUDIO OPIANO amp HARPSI O_EPIANO OACCORDI N PERCUSSION O GUITAR O BRASS O woopwil STRINGS PAD SYNTH O ORGAN FLUTES CI ats RESET HEI MIC IH TYPE MIC CAL coven SECT SETI IARMONY O TALK O EFFECT e osam O O Q ONE TOUCH SETTING DIRECT Te gt ENTER o o o o L SDr amp AAAAAAAA em 1 2 3 4 O B LO Bale de ee E a A a A A ig STYLE CONTROL Q g g U g g g g q omae ames ommo o a e eg RENE omre Se reser Loo gt 2O00 r Celle JI Ils gt 7 P O even 2 pe a le e 2 eal GS fells gt 1 elsjja jsjjel zjje fw ti XS AG BE 996 SD J NOTE Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default initial tempo settings designed to best suit the song style TAP TEMPO TEMPO ET DD L
2. YAM AHA Bae oh lb Otoucu Osustan O GNO Omono Ovarumon N AO TAMANA _ OPIANO amp HARPSI O_E PIANO o win ca pena rer nr PR PENG NT EEE TON MEMOR og r a oo o io f T m ARo Ft r 20O agoe Aa 8 e o oi H5 7 8 0 J fit Xe A VA mah SN Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages ENGLISH JAPANESE Basic Operations Operation Buttons Select Itens and Change Settinas Direct Access Usina the Functions Settina the Split Point Settina the Tenpo Usina Channel On Off File Operations Drive PRESET USER FLOPPY DISK LAHGUAGE Dren Save Displays benonstration JAPAHESE D Playing the bewos ith D NOTE Voices SPAHISH electing Voices ITALIAH GERMAN FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION LANGUAGE page 151 display D NOTE When JAPANESE is selected for the Language parameter and you change this to one of the western lan guages the kanji and kana charac ters of the file name stored in the disk drive are changed to western charac ters In the opposite case special Latin characters and marks are changed into normal characters Also in the case of floppy disk data text in the files are changed to char acter
3. D NOTE For a list of the available accompaniment styles refer to the separate Data List 2 1 Select a location Preset User Floppy Disk for saving the style 2 2 Select a Style When you ve opened a lower directory s display this button UP lets you call up the next higher directory from which you can select Style groups PSR 2000 1000 When the ACMP button is set to on you can play indicate chords from the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard Depending on the settings this may be the range of the Left voice or the entire keyboard ONTROL MAIN ENDING O BREAK O INTRO o O Irit O STOP O START O START STOP OFILLIN O LINK bt MERE ESS BE ea Turn SYNC SYNCHRONIZED START on STYLE CONTROL lo ee e se SYNC ACMP O BREAK O INTRO STOP START STOP Ae See M8 Le EA 5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section the style starts For details about chord fingerings refer to page 62 The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO lt p gt or TAP TEMPO button If you tap the TAP TEMPO Waal WW TETT button the tempo will adjust to fm the same speed that you tapped E Split point Auto Accompaniment sectio
4. DC IN To electrical outlet Connect the other end normal AC plug to the nearest electrical outlet A WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA 300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR 2000 1000 and may even pose a serious shock hazard ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE PSR 2000 1000 IS NOT IN USE Audio equipment first mixer then amplifier A CAUTION Never interrupt the power supply e g unplug the AC adaptor during any PSR 2000 1000 record operation Doing so can result in a loss of data A CAUTION Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the PSR 2000 1000 for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet O PSR 2000 1000 Powering Up A CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment always switch on the power of the 2000 1000 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier Likewise always switch off the power of the 2000 1000 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and ampli fier A CAUTION Even when the switch is in the STANDBY
5. Select the desired word or item by using the DATAENTRY dial then press the ENTER button or number buttons 1 W 2 V etc to call it up Return to the MAIN screen PSR 2000 1000 Voices The PSR 2000 1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices including various keyboard instruments strings and brass and many many more O PIANO amp HARPSI E PIANO ORGAN amp O ACCORDION O PERCUSSION COA DATATA TAATAI J MEMORY BAE w FEF2CCICICI fils Xe A 77 98 Sm 1 Press the MAIN button to turn the MAIN part on then press F button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice POSE SOMG dd Ji NewSong STYLE ded a Hr HeartBeat INTRO EHDING Abar Abar ag LRANS oO UAE UPPER SPLIT Footage OM Comm A FRE ge crandPians MULTI PAD tt Tom Flam REGISTRATION BANK NewBank Turn MAIN on You ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off J NOTE The voice you re sele
6. Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices page 25 54 The PSR 2000 1000 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices including piano strings woodwinds and more BACK NEXT MAIN LAYER H mm LEFT O PERCUSSION music FINDER SELECT SETTING O HAR ONY O TALK OEFF C3 Organ Flutes PSR 2000 Craft your own organ VOICes page 91 This special function not only gives you a full set of rich and luscious organ sounds it also lets you create your own original organ voices just as on a traditional organ by TO HOST terminal Make music with a computer quickly and easily page 154 Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software Connections and setup are exceptionally easy and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds all from a single PSR 2000 1000 increasing and decreasing the flute footages and adding percussive sounds Vocal Harmony PSR 2000 Add automatic vocal backing to your singing page 128 The amazing Vocal Harmony feature on the PSR 2000 automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a microphone You can even change the gender of the harmony voices for example l
7. REGISTRATION MEMORY OFREEZE 0 0 PMERCNHEMNNME a MEMORY 3 REGISTRATION HEHORY GOHTEHTS Press one of the REG 1 8 or COTS 1 d1 Cancels the registration buttons to store the current setting and returns to the MAIN Select the desired parameter groups Mark the arourts to be memorized ta display You can also use for the settings you want to register re a You can also use the DATA ENTRY En the EXIT button dial to navigate in this display To register a parameter group checkmark the corresponding box Groups left et without checkmarks will not be included CAE CIHARHOHY 5006 f VOICE O TEMPO O HIC in the Registration Memory setting CI TUWE TRANS PEDAL i O SCALE I HULTI PAD This allows you to maintain certain Enters a checkmark to the settings even when switching among selected box You can also Registration Memory presets You can use the ENTER button also use the Freeze function page 86 to override the Registration Memory changes letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed D mm je Removes the checkmark from the selected box You can also use the ENTER button D NOTE Any data that was previ ously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button indica tor is green or red will be erased and replaced by the new settings Press the desired REGISTRATION MEMORY b b tt OFR
8. eovonnovrrnvvrrnvevessee 91 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator 92 About Song Recording ccesescecssseeesseeeeseees 92 Quick RECOPING ccsrsscsvsssesssscsescosssccossccosscscaees 93 Multi Recording sisdessasscsccssscecssacscasveieacssveansvexesabecieys 94 Recording Individual Notes Step Record 96 PN 96 Recording Melodies Step Record Note 98 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompani ment Step Record Chord cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 Select the Recording Options Starting Stopping Punching In Out Rec Mode 101 Editing a Recorded Song ccceeesceeeseeeeeees 102 Editing Channel related Parameters Channel 102 Editing Note Events 1 16 rrnnnnnnnnvvrnnnvvrnnvvvrnnn 105 Editing Chord Events CHD eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 106 Editing System Events SYS EX System Exclusive 106 Inputting and Editing Lyrics eerrnnrrnnnvrrnnnvrrnnvvrnnnn 107 Customizing the Event List Filter 107 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator 108 About Creating Accompaniment Styles 108 Style File Formal sesesessosnnaveenarendesnsncecstingeneressseeesssss 109 OCT ALON EE RE 109 Realtime Recording Basic ernovvnnevvrnnevennenennneee 110 Step Recordmg uaarasvmengesisssmib ds ken 111 Assembling an Accompaniment Style
9. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti French Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Italian Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si German Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Spanish Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si Japanese ar Movable Do Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals and as such are relative to the key The root note is indicated as Do For example in the key of G major the root note of Sol would be indicated as Do As with Fixed Do the indication differs depending on the selected language E 8A OK This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation You can also execute this by pressing the ENTER button on the panel J NOTE You can select the display pages one before and after by the using the BACK NEXT buttons or the pedal page 139 E 8V CANCEL This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings You can also execute this by pressing the EXIT button or RECORD button on the panel PSR 2000 1000 Displaying the Lyrics Song Playback This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback Microphone input is available only on the PSR 2000 Select the desired song page 76 78 Moe MG UPPER g pst AT FOINT F z Aa INTRO EHDIHG REGISTRATION BAKE Intro Ending N
10. J NOTE To input rests simply move the measure beat clock location for the desired rest time then input the next note E Play back the newly created melody Use the C A button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song and press the SONG START STOP button to hear the newly entered notes To actually enter the recorded data press the EXIT button The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR 1 16 display page 105 PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment Step Record Chord The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing Since the changes don t have to be played in real time you can easily create complex tight chord changes over which you can record the melody in normal fashion The operations here apply to step 6 on page 97 Entering Chords and Sections Chord Step For example you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below MAIN A BREAK MAIN B J p J J J J 3 3 p J s 3 J 3 J Enter the chords by using the currently 4 4 4 4 4 4 selected chord fingering method in the Auto C F G F ae7 c Accompaniment section of the keyboard 1 Press the MAIN A button to specify the section and enter the chords as shown at right MAINA Lid t 001 1 0000 Sty 00151
11. If the selected song does not contain lyric data lyrics are not displayed Enables disables display of the chords If the selected song does not contain chord data chords are not displayed Enables disables display of the note name pitch Determines the display resolution or zoom level of the notation SMALL LARGE PSR 2000 1000 Notation is shown in small size Notation is shown in large size This calls up the detailed setting display for notation For details see the next page J NOTE If the MAIN screen at left is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT but ton J NOTE The displayed notation is generated by the PSR 2000 1000 based on the song data As a result it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes D NOTE Some song data for the PSR 2000 1000 has been recorded with special free tempo settings For such song data the tempo beat measure and music notation will not displayed correctly D NOTE RIGHT and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same time D NOTE The note name is indicated at the left of the note When the space between the notes is too small the indi cation may be moved to the top left of the note D NOTE You can increase the num ber of measures that will be display
12. In the latter case the external device must be connected to the PSR 2000 1000 MIDI IN terminal and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal E Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off When this is set to OFF no MIDI clock or START STOP data is transmitted E Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to OFF note data received by the PSR 2000 1000 is not transposed and when it is set to ON the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR 2000 1000 keyboard transpose page 141 setting J NOTE E Start Stop Ace Determines whether incoming FA start and FC stop messages affect song or MIDI messages for starting stop style playback ping the song or style The FA message corresponds to start and FC corresponds to stop Message Switch SYS EX Tx TRANSMIT 06 Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF SYS EX Rx RECEIVE 0064 Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF CHORD SYS EX Tx TRANSMIT Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data chord detect root and type ON or OFF CHORD SYS EX Rx RECEIVE Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF Transmitting MIDI Data Transmit This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI
13. 152 Connecting to a Computer u unaresamehasunveirmrmen 154 OOO EE ERE 139 Converting into Kanji Japanese language rrrnrrnnnnnnnnvvrrnrnn 45 COON REE EE 55 EE JE ee er er ee ee 43 Copying and Formatting Disks cccccccceceeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 150 Copying Files Foldef Siessenek innii 43 Copying from Disk to Disk eeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeentneeeeeeees 150 Creating Accompaniment Styles cccccceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 108 Ue IAC 19101 EE EE EE EE EN 39 Customizing the Event List Filter rrrrrrrnnnnrrrrnnnnnvvrennn 107 UA 42 D Data EE EE EN 158 PANT 19 46 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT RECEIVE Display 146 DON terminal sesirsinsiniesdcdescisncwisineensnteateavetwasacvaentvantwonaweed 19 153 DAG PRE EE 89 DELETE Basic Operations crasseieseniciiouicugcionnadwsttatiseotunacagouen 43 Delete Song Creator cssssssssccscccessssssscesccccsesssssssseenees 103 BOL REE 71 Deleting Files FOlders aars ae 43 DEMOT bie 14 18 52 DEP 90 PINNE 103 Detailed Settings for Notation rrrrrrrnnrnrrrnnnnnvvrrrrrnrrrnnsnnnn 81 DIGITAL RECORDING button eee 14 18 92 108 DIRECT Ne 19 47 DEKON A EEE 158 Disk Orchestra Collection rrrrrrrrnnrrrrrrnnnvvvrrrrnnnrrrnnnnssereenn 17 DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER stssicsaseesonsonatirteetonusenentteruasabecanees 149 Displaying Music Notation eseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Displaying the Lyrics EEE 83 Dis
14. This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off When this is set to off the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard E SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is on all notes played on the keyboard MAIN LAYER parts only have a longer sustain You can also set the Sustain depth page 90 E DSP The PSR 2000 1000 features a variety of dynamic built in digital effects letting you process the sound in various ways You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound DSP is set for the currently selected part MAIN LAYER LEFT D NOTE The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CON SOLE display page 124 PSR 2000 1000 Voices E VARIATION This control changes the Variation effect settings letting you alter some aspect of the effect depending on the selected type For example when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected page 124 this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast E HARMONY ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard page 143 J NOTE The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide
15. _ _ VARIATION LA via BREAK SS lt via BREAK MAIN VARIATION D via BREAK Press the ENDING button You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by ENDING page 66 resona the ENDING button again while the ending is playing back max four patterns D NOTE e An Intro doesn t necessarily have to be at the beginning If you want you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the INTRO button at the desired point Watch your timing with the Break sections If you press a BREAK button too close to the end of the measure i e after the final eighth note the Break section starts playing from the next measure This also applies to the Auto Fill in e Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style if you want If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending simply press the INTRO button while the Ending section is playing If you press the BREAK button while the ending is playing the break will immediately start playing continuing with the main section Other Controls FADE IN OUT The FADE IN OUT button can be used to produce smooth fade ins and fade outs page 65 when starting and stopping FADE O IN OUT TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by tapping out the tempo with the TAP TEMPO button For details TAP TEMPO see page 51 SYNG STOP When Synchro Stop is o
16. are played back simultaneously If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display page 110 OFF does not appear and is not available PSR 2000 1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Edit the Created Accompaniment Style Change the Rhythmic Feel Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109 HM Groove CREATOR HeartBeat ERHB EE JP STYLE CR i EFFE HSSEHBET FE Use these to select the 2 DVMANTCS Cd Calls up the Style display and Groove lets you chanse the swings feel dg eaa c GET lets you store the ER for example from 8 beat to shuffle accompaniment stvle data H BAR 1 om ie E J EE BEL CONVERTER SHIHG FIHE 2 JIL OFE EE 16BEAT 12 2 PUSH A Executes the Groove operation After en SPHE the operation is completed this button aE a ESN mia EN ELEN changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Groove results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters see the list below I Groove parameters Original Beat Beat Converter Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is
17. DONG P DK Lurer 21 Playback OF SOS De 21 Playing VOICES Luer rnrn Ra a NEN i 25 NIE 25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously rrnrrrnnnvrnnnvre 26 Playing Different Voices with the Left NARR 27 Playing SUVICS SEE 28 GEA EN E sea 28 Sar Se oe EE ET ET 30 One Touch SENG vvs 32 Music Go ERE 33 Using the Music Finder srrnnnnrrrnnvrrnnnvrvnnnvernnnvvrnnne 33 Searching the Music Finder Records rrvvrnnnnvrrnnvrr 34 Playing with the Songs cssssceeeseceeseeeeeseees 36 Playing Along with the PSR 2000 1000 36 ROCOTO ENE 37 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data 38 Example Open Save display for Voice 39 Selecting Files and Folders ccceessceesseeeees 40 File Folder related Operations cceeeseeee 41 Naming Files Folder arves 41 Moving Files Fold rs unsnesisruisienddemmeseed 42 Copying Fles FOIdErs sirsiran 43 Deleting Files POIGELS sesstasascssocstasdentanendineuaniederteacs 43 Saving PICS EE eae 44 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder 44 Displaying Upper Level pages rrrnrnnnnrrnnnnvrrnnvnvnnnve 44 Entering Characters and Changing Icons 44 Using the DATA ENTRY Dial eee ee 46 Direct Access Instant Selection of Displays 47 Help Messages Le 49 Using the Metronome ccceessceeesceeeseeeeeseees 50 Adjusting the Tempo esssessssessss
18. Division Claviers BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 PK 22 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefiihrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsl ndern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen Electronica Musical S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 201 0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S A Navarinou Street 13 P Code 10680 Athens Greece Tel 01 364 7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata I Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen FER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 86
19. EE I caettececetconsce ed cneecue acerca bagece a tpaesesee eee 138 MIA re 71 Applying Voice Effects rrrrrrrnnrrrnrnnnnnvvrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnerrerrnnnnnnn 57 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style 67 Fo EE TE 136 Arranging the Style Pattern rrnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrrrrnrrrrrrnnnrrverrnnnnnne 64 Assembling an Accompaniment Style eesse 112 ASSIGN HARMONY cochccssanes cascopiceeeseneeuaeetetacessareeuetandoneiee 90 Attack Organ Flutes EE 91 ATTACK Regular Voice cceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeennneeeeeeeeeeeeens 89 TO 20 AUTOGR od cere ree trate rere erent rer er ener reer 137 AOF 18 66 AUG REVOI spe AERES 122 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings MEN 68 AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED L R jacks 19 153 B BACK butonssssusmmenkesmnusiefvsnbsiun 19 40 46 PU NE een nn teen E teen ee eee er 61 BALANCE button cciciideciccecascecscsnsansssavecatecoacswsedeeuscanesees 19 61 PU 115 pe errr rere are eer ere EE err rere ery 115 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data scce 38 25 epee arp aston en opp EE TE 94 EE 70 71 Beal CONV ETE 113 OSU I EEE EET 114 BREAK DOHO uugasedrononsesnensdamenmeesbaabenddnhekastnn 18 64 PAINE o ee cs eee sender neta 89 C Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your MUSIC cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteees 69 GJE EEE 135 Oo PSR 2000 1000 Change the Rhythmic Feel rrrrrnnnrrnrrnnnnvnvrrrrrnrrrrnnnnnrsrennn 113 Changing Pitch related Settings rrrrrnnnnnnrrrrrrrnrrrrrnnnrrvre
20. PS pl wi Score Function ea Vocal Harmony s Style Creator Voice Demos showcase the voices of the PSR 2000 1000 Style Demos intro duce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the FUNCTION Overall 1 PSR 2000 1000 page 52 Pi 3 Press any of the A to J buttons or 8V AUTO button FUNCTION page only to select the Demo songs For this example press the 8V AUTO button All of the function demos are played back in sequence D NOTE HETTE ESTEE For details about the Demos ren Lyrics Display refer to page 52 LAYER amp amp Score Function C Vocal Harmony pa T Reverb Effect T Sound Creator T Music Finder ah Style Creator FUNCTION Overall AAB AP UYU UYU U Press the EXIT button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you ve finished playing the demo songs When you re done with the Demos you can get to know your PSR 2000 1000 even better with these functions e Song playback page 21 e Short demo playback of the selected voice in the Voice Open display page 26 Quick Guide eeecercececerrereeceerereceeeerececeeeeece eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee e Song Playback Reference on page 75 J NOTE Make sure that the Lan guage setting for the instru ment page 151 is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back
21. Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT Sends out MIDI messages generated by the PSR 2000 1000 For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it refer to the following sections e What s MIDI page 155 e What You Can Do With MIDI page 158 e MIDI functions page 145 J NOTE e Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters PSR 2000 1000 amp Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices O Connecting to a Computer MIDI terminals TO HOST terminal Connect your PSR 2000 1000 to computer and take advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile software for creating and editing music The PSR 2000 1000 can be connected in three ways E Using the TO HOST terminal W Using the MIDI terminals W Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional USB interface UX series J NOTE e You ll need an appropriate music MIDI software program such as a sequencer compatible with your computer platform e When connecting the PSR 2000 1000 to a personal computer first turn off the power to both the PSR 2000 1000 and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch After making the proper connections and settings turn on the power of the computer first then that of the PSR 2000 1000 If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR 2000 1000 make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal If the cable is left connected the PS
22. Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S A De C V Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No 1149 Col Gpe Del Moral Deleg Iztapalapa 09300 Mexico D F Tel 686 00 33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA Av Rebou as 2636 S o Paulo Brasil Tel 011 853 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panama S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panama Panama Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen ER of Germany Tel 04101 3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G 3526KL Utrecht The Netherlands Tel 030 2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 02 7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France
23. channel in the STYLE PART display can be assigned to any voice except for the Organ Flutes voice 3 NOTE When playing GM song data channel 10 in the SONG CH 9 16 page can only be used for a Drum Kit voice J NOTE When changing the rhythm percussion voices drum kits etc of the accompani ment style and song from the VOICE parameter the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset and in some cases you may be unable to restore the Original sound In the case of song playback you can restore the original sound by returning to the begin ning of the song and playing back from that point In the case of accompaniment style play you can restore the original sound by select ing the same style again D NOTE Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound depending on the particular song data Changing Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console the Tone of the Voice Filter The operations for this DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR w y DIGITAL RECORDING wr y IXING CONSOL page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121 Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters D NOTE For details about the Filter see page 89 D NOTE Be careful with these con trols Depending on the selected voice extreme set tin
24. holding down the REC button and pressing the appropriate button 1A V 84 V Several channels can be selected at the same time Enables recording for the channel Enables playback of the channel Mutes the channel J NOTE The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to REC at the same time To cancel or disable recording press the REC button once again aa AAAA PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator 3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded This determines which of the keyboard played parts Main Layer Left and the accompaniment style parts RHYTHM 1 2 BASS etc are recorded to the recording channels selected in step 2 For a list of the initial default assignments see page 94 alge RANS g SIE EPER g an SPLIT FOSE OCTAVE POINT Fer SOHG dd d 145 MATH Ja Aowsong a OrightPiana FY HATH fm GalaxyEP lover MULTI PAD H Pap Decdt t Tom Flam HEAD JHDIHG REGISTRATION BANK CHANNEL ON OFF Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard You can also start recording by pressing the SONG STYLE START STOP button The recording can be started stopped by pressing the foot pedal if the recording punch in out function is set to the pedal page 101 To stop recording press the REC button again You can also use the foot peda
25. o s IE E g S Ja is og HOR m TAP TEMPO NSPOSE TEMPO 2 DIE DEE BD OF OF OG O S A 5 osae B o o eo ool Sra ge ee ee i rm o Playing a layer of two voices LAYER part MAIN part Playing two voices separately on the left Split point and right sections of the keyboard EFT part a NA MAIN part Left range Right range Playing three different voices one on the Split point left section of the keyboard plus a layer of LAYER part two on the right NN LEFT a part MAIN part Left range Right range Layer Layering Two Different Voices D NOTE Press this to 2 Select Layer with the G button Press the same There is an alternate way for turn me SAYEN button to call up the VOICE display from which you quickly selecting both the function on To l h fi i lvi MAIN and LAYER voices turn it off press can select the specific voice you want to play In a from the panel While hold the button again layer with the Main voice The method of selec
26. the position at which it is to be entered This is available only when recording the melody For information on gate time settings see below Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display normal dotted and triplet This is available only when recording the melody Use these to move the selected event in units of measures BAR beat and clocks For information on measure beat clock settings see below Specifies the type of note to be input next Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody Deletes the event at the cursor This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered wy To close the STEP RECORD display press the EXIT button Make sure to store the recorded my data by pressing the I SAVE button page 44 M Measure Beat Clock Measure 1 2 Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Clock 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 1919 POPA E E E E ii WE Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values Kbd Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp Actual playing 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 strength M Gate Time The following settings are available Normal 000 O 80 Tenuto ooorornoonnernvr ee 99 Staccato E 4o Staccatissimo EN J20 M
27. 160 Specifications 6 162 Index Luren 104 Introduction Quick Guide Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Playing the Demos Voices Styles The Multi Pad Song Playback Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory Editing Voices Sound Creator Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Creating Multi Pad Multi Pad Creator Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Appendix PSR 2000 1000 amp gt Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation Listening Listening tothe WA Ge SONGS EE ENE NE EN page 76 Listening tO disk SOS EE Playing Back Songs on Disk on page 78 Ke E SO SOIC EE NE EE AE A page 52 Listening to the demo of the selected VOICES eeeeeeeeeeeenneneeeeececeeeeeeeeeecnneaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees page 54 Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR 2000 1000 rrvrrvvvnvvrennvvvrnnnvnvrrnnnvrrnnnnsernnnvrreseesee page 122 Playing Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch rrnannvrrnrrnnnnnnvvvnrrrnnnnnnrrnnrennn Transpose Assign on page 141 Combining TWO VOICES kan alearruldr
28. 2000 1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played WE Style File The Style File Format SFF is Yamaha s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types Voice Allocation Format With MIDI voices are assigned to specific numbers called program numbers The numbering standard order of voice allocation is referred to as the voice allocation format Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback The PSR 2000 1000 is compatible with the following formats J NOTE Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above the data may still not be completely compatible depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods E GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats e Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1 as is most commercially available software E XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future e Song data recorded on the PSR 2000 1000 using v
29. 700 dynamic rich and realistic voices Try Playing Voices Reference on page 54 playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music Here you ll learn how to select individual voices combine two voices in a layer and split two voices between your left and right hands Playing a Voice 1 Press the MAIN button to turn the MAIN part on then press the F button to call up the menu for selecting MAIN voice If the MAIN screen is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT button TRANS HII UPPER SPLIT ate pose o Mi octave O MM omt A Aa SONG dd JJ NewSong ge CHORD STYLE ded fe HeartBeat IHTRO EHDIHG Abar Abar J 145 MULTI PAD i Tom Flam REGISTRATION BANK NewBank 2 Select a voice group For this example STRINGS is selected ORGAN amp O PIANO amp HARPSI E PIANO O ACCORDION Turn MAIN on You ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off Pi J NOTE The voice you re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part and is called the MAIN voice See page 56 for more information EEEBBBS BIR Me Rock Piano Me Midi Grand b Piano amp Harpsichord O PERCUSSION Live i i i i O GUITAR i i i I O STRINGS O USE ee Lc 25 O BASS O CHOIR amp PAD i O ORGAN FLUTES i O
30. Abar NewBank Countln dbar1 3 Play the style using ENDING the Intro or Ending FilSMit abar section page 30 31 Select a Intro Select a Ending Playing Fill in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections Auto Fill In D NOTE Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style STYLE CONTROL Pa Ne 2 ENDING O ACMP BREAK INTRO o STOP O START O START STOP feresdsdta IS mo ele ed D NOTE You can also add a fill in by pressing the selected MAIN button again Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play page 30 31 Fill in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections D NOTE You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a perfor mance by pressing the next Main section s button twice quickly S l E To cancel the Auto Fill press the AUTO FILLIN button again ND PSR 2000 1000 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style ONE TOUCH SETTING The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you re playing Each preset style has four pre programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button f 1 A Jl EET 7 EEE ree a oR I om omr oE YAMAHA ce wee OS EEE ane 0 oe E H STYLE v 8 mm a KN OrGANA o me TOG __ O STAREE TOE EM r
31. BRASS O SYNTH O WOODWIND 4 Strings Allegra Live b Orchestra 44 Symphon tr 4 Strings Press the BACK NEXT button to select the memory location of the voice For this example PRESET is selected VOICE Maar 4 OrchStrings a Orch Brass 4 Orch Flute 4 Orch FLBr a Orch Oboe Playing Voices 3 Select a voice Live 4 Strings 44 DrehStrin BE Allegro 43 Orchestra 44 Symphon tr FY nos ee Orch Oboe E gt a OI c D et h For this example Strings is selected Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages and discover even more voices 4 Play the voices D NOTE e You can instantly jump back to the Main display by double clicking on one of the A J buttons e The voices displayed on the PSR 1000 are differ ent from the example dis play at left however the operations are identical Press the 8A button to start the Demo for the selected voice To stop the Demo press this button again There s more to the Demo features than just voices though for more information see page 52 Naturally you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard but you can also I have the PSR 2000 1000 demonstrate the voice for you Simply press the 84 button from the display above and a Demo of the voice plays automatically Playing Two Voices
32. I EE A E E 97 MONO POLY Sound Creator L nnumuAammmmm 38 GEER 81 Moving Files Folders ansiazaisus sencscuschaxasbacntconauenaeuneatentenasteanstsnoes 42 Keyboard Percussion cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 55 ET auch ve MULTI FINGER Luise sand ESINEEN di 62 eyboard TOUCh ace sepceneractaessrohecemceraeadencunntnva cioaedosecieerenes MULTI PAD 1 4 buttons Lamratsesu 18 73 JO DO 1005 RE 141 Multi Pads 14 FY OD E A AREE AAE A LEER AE 70 71 i TV Kirnb 136 KJE EE 0610 rer irrosadara eroris ennonn ea 94 MADEBE EEE MUSIC FINDER button munnen 15 19 33 69 L Music Finder Record Edit rrovnoernnennvrnnvnnernnvnnvnnnnrnennennnenee 71 Music Finder Search scssinccuesosseaccsacenrensssacsuensebiintnwdentubesedewenses 70 ER E E i i 22 138 VMS 17 ES EE TE 56 Muting Specific Parts svaie 79 Layering Two Different VOICES sssssssssesesssssssssseseereeesssssee 56 GD EE AEE EEES 15 N LCD CONTRAST KNOb sssssssssssserrssserssrersserrseerrsreresrenens mr NM 41 44 EE EEE 57 i Naming Files and Folders rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnne 41 UT le 81 NEW Folder 44 LEFT HOLD button roerornnvrnennvnnennennennennennennennennenneneee EN GE TNT Length LENG O Flutes 91 NEW RECORD secs ccdiccacemacdurictnseiemnduehdecewnnsssnadtdsagaaiesuibadentate 72 TE E anes ressranese seas NEXT button n se 19 40 46 NE ne NOISE GATE 130 Eo a Ea e EEE 145 l di 108 No Moe E E E A 101 oe S 3 3 107 PN O
33. In the above example the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist s performance are captured in the recording as audio data and this is recorded to CD When you play back that CD on your audio system you can hear the actual piano performance The piano itself is not necessary since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano and your speakers reproduce them Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument MIDI data Recording Playback In the case of digital instruments the audio signals are sent through output jacks such as AUX OUT on the instrument O PSR 2000 1000 The controller and tone generator in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example Here the player s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data see illustration below In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano special recording equipment is needed However since the PSR 2000 1000 features a built in sequencer that lets you record performance data this recording equipment is unnecessary Instead your digital instrument the PSR 2000 1000 allows you to both record and play back the data Tone to Sequencer Keyboard performance MIDI data However we also need a sound source to produce the audio which eventually comes from your speakers The tone generator of the PSR 2000 1000 fills this function The recorded performa
34. O SIGNAL O EFFECT YAMAHA ves ser NY j Pe fe mr Q S Ne I o uw CICICJ O iia A A LR 527 Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting page 152 gt o J O 0 0 TT 2 o o G G GGL ee eee VOCAL TYPE E O HARMONY 7 MIC SELECT SETTING Determines the on off setting of the effect applied to the microphone set in the This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE MIXING CONSOLE display page 124 display page 129 and lets you set the desired harmony type This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using a connected microphone This is especially useful when This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING you talk between songs during a performance display page 130 and lets you adjust the level of the microphone and vocal harmony effect If you connect a microphone to the PSR 2000 you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have vocal harmony parts added automatically PSR 2000 Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type 1 Press the VH TYPE SELECT button Select a Vocal Harmony type This lets yo
35. Parameters Style Setting and Split Point STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING These select the part to which the split point setting is applied accompaniment left hand range or both Press the desired key for the split point while holding down one of these buttons The pressed key is included in the range for the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard ACMP or the left hand range LEFT A L ACMP LEFT Allows you to simultaneously set the split J NOTE About Section Set When any of the Main A D sections is not included in the accompaniment style data the nearest section is automatically selected For example when Main D is not contained in the selected ACAP TIMING SEAD OM TOUGH SET acHP LEFT_ 9 point for both the left hand range and the accompaniment style Main Ea wane Auto Accompaniment section of the C will be called up TIHE HAIH A F 2 F 2 ke board OH HEXT F OH HAIH E y MG ear HAI C FSA FSS Fas FAA FAA a eee Allows you to set the split point for the left hand range of the keyboard A ACMP Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the fo fo l keyboard l 2 oO g s s 7 Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment ACMP and the left 0 o y v o y hand range LEFT The same value can be set for both or for each independently using buttons F G and H see above You can use th
36. Pedal settings wa A message prompting you to save the current style will appear Select YES Ein to call up the STYLE display then save the panel settings page 38 44 PSR 2000 1000 D NOTE The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings page 138 e Immediately when you press a section button e At the next measure in an accompaniment style after you press a section button Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ONE TOUCH SETTING This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups four setups per style For a list of One Touch MEMORY J NOTE Unless you store the panel settings here the registered settings will be deleted when you select a different accompaniment style Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music Music Finder The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the instrument including voice style and One Touch Settings simply by selecting the desired song title If you want to play a certain song but don t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate the convenient Music Finder function will help you out The recommended settings which together make up a record can also be edited and stored This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall J NOTE The MUSIC FINDER records and its contents
37. Press the A J button Press the letter button corresponding to the file folder you wish to call up In the example display shown above the voice files are shown Use the DATA ENTRY dial and the ENTER button When you turn the DATA ENTRY dial the highlight moves among the available files folders Highlight the desired file or folder voice files are shown in the example above and press the ENTER button to call up the selected item a NOTE Highlighting the desired file and double clicking the ENTER button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display DATA ENTRY When the amount of available files or folders exceeds ten the bottom of the display changes as shown below WJ Ein Press the EXIT button to go back to the MAIN Exiting from small pop up Me OME oere O MMe display windows You can go back to the You can also exit from small oF i previous display by pop up windows such as in the E pressing the EXIT illustration below by pressing s button the EXIT button INTRO EHDING REGISTRATION BANK 4bar2 Abar NewBank O PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data File Folder related Operations Naming Files Folders You can assign names to files and folders Any file folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive If t
38. Simultaneously 1 Press the VOICE PART ON OFF LAYER button to turn i the LAYER part on I LAYER 2 Press the G button to select the LAYER part rar Select a voice group Here we ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound Call up the CHOIR amp PAD group O GUITAR 3 4 5 I i i I Select a voice O STRINGS For example select Gothic Vox Play the voices Now you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section plus the new LAYER voice you ve selected here And that s just the beginning Check out these other voice related features ORGAN amp O PIANO amp HARPSI O E PIANO O ACCORDION O PERCUSSION O BASS O BRASS O WOODWIND O CHOIR amp PAD O SYNTH e Create your own original voices quickly and easily by changing the settings of existing voices page 87 e Set up your favorite panel settings including voices styles and more and call them up whenever you need them page 84 Quick Guide eeesercececrrereeceerereceeereecece eee ece eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee e Playing Voices Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 1 Press the VOICE PART ON OFF LEFT button to turn the LEFT MAIN part on CJ LAYER LEFT Q 2 Press the H button to select the LEFT part 3 Select a voice group Here we ll select the S
39. Song Playback Here s where all of the amazing voices effects rhythms styles and other sophisticated features of the PSR 2000 1000 come together in songs Song related buttons BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons Floppy disk drive The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR 2000 1000 Refer to pages 75 158 for more details on the logos J NOTE Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument and as such you may not be able to select them The maximum capacity is about 200 300KB however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song L Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard Xa Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control A Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha s DOC format Playback of Songs 1 If you want to play back a disk song insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive A CAUTION e Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks on page 7 eo Le 21 Song Playback 2 Press the A button to call up the Song Open display If the MAIN screen is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by th
40. Volume Balance Channel Muting BALANCE display MULTI PAD part MIC part Call up the BALANCE STYLE part Auto Accompaniment section f ERLU 100 sk re Parts played from the keyboard MAIN LAYER SONG part LEFT Adjust the output level of the Part CHANNEL ON OFF display display D NOTE Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data page 157 The channels are assigned as shown below Song 1 16 Accompaniment Style 9 16 Call up the Channel ON EAREN Call up the STYLE display by pressing the CHANNEL ON OFF button then turn the instrument you want to cancel off To listen to only one instrument by itself hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO To cancel SOLO simply press the appropriate channel button again PSR 2000 1000 Styles Chord Fingerings The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point There are 7 types of fingerings as described below Go to the CHORD FINGERING page page 139 and select the Chord Fingerings The page shows how to play chords with your left hand SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major seventh minor and minor seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are
41. a microphone to the PSR 2000 you can enjoy singing along with your own performance or song playback A dynamic microphone is recommended The PSR 2000 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through meine Weur MEN the built in speakers A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late night playing The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack page 149 P 153 R L R L L R a AUX OUT TE Lu outpuT P 154 P 153 P 153 152 PSR 2000 1000 Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Playing the sounds of the PSR 2000 1000 through an external audio system and recording the sounds to an external recorder AUX OUT OUTPUT jacks You can connect the PSR 2000 1000 to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables D NOTE Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance AN CAUTION When the PSR 2000 1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are connected to an external audio system first turn on the power to the PSR 2000 1000 then to the external audio system Reverse this order when you turn the power off Audio cable To powered speaker gg Tom HEN dd 66 L Cassette tape recorder Phone plug standard Aor Tourer stereo system When these are connected with stan
42. accompaniment will stop and the PSR 2000 1000 will enter Syn chronized Start standby status You can also change style sections by using the pedal page 139 The Break section lets you add dynamic varia tions and breaks in the rhythm of the accompani ment to make your per formance sound even more professional If you press the BREAK but ton while an accompani ment is playing the fill in will play back for one measure The indicator of the desti nation section MAIN A B C D will flash while the Break is playing When the AUTO FILLIN button is set to on and the MAIN A B C D but ton is pressed after the final half beat eighth note of the measure the fill in will begin from the next measure automatically You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by pressing the same ENDING rit button again while the ending is playing back 5 This switches to the ending section When the ending is finished the Style stops STYLE CONTROL HE MAIN ENDING O ACMP BREAK INTRO O O Ir O STOP O START O START STOP en O CINK Ey fe DENCH B RS PE ce Fade in Fade out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade in Fade out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment To start the style with a fade in press the FADE IN OUT button then turn SYNC START on To cancel the fade in before starting the style press the button again To fade out and stop the Style pre
43. any genres you ve entered yourself page 69 E 8V CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display PSR 2000 1000 3 NOTE The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for searching it cannot be used to call up the actual accom paniment style Editing Records Music Finder Record Edit From this display you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your D NOTE preferences You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records You can also change clear a preset record To avoid chang 1 Press the 8 A V RECORD EDIT button in the MUSIC FINDER display ing clearing the record register the record as a new record 2 Change clear the record data You can also register new records For details about all settings and operations see below after editing D NOTE All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single file page 151 When calling up a stored file a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired e Replace All Music Finder records cur Must o E 2 4 3 d ERE 6 8 OTHER OFF GEHRE riene All Tine Hits Ballad EG OK Yu rently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file Append The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers 120 AY E A MUSIC Selects th
44. are changed into normal JAPANESE GERHAN characters Also in the case of floppy disk data text in the files are changed to charac ters that cannot be read by the instrument Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating system In general be careful when switching languages you risk not being able to access the data properly see page 45 This name is automatically FREHCH shown when you turn SPAHISH ITALIAN the power on AV j Determines the language used for the display messages Once you change this setting all messages will be shown in the selected language Restoring the Factory programmed Settings of the PSR 2000 1000 System Reset This operation lets you restore the PSR 2000 1000 to its original factory settings These settings include System Setup MIDI Setup User Effect Music Finder and Files amp Folders Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard C6 and turning on the power J NOTE The functions and settings below do not apply to the Factory Reset operation However you can restore these to their original set tings by calling up the preset System Setup files using the Open Sa
45. between successively played notes E MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically only one note at a time or polyphonically for each part MAIN LAYER LEFT This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off When set to MONO only the last note played will sound This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically Depending on the selected voice the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect when playing in legato oF HINT You can add special empha sis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a mono phonic voice Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically MONO In this case the melody you play including the top notes of any chords sounds monophonically Try this using the following voices MAIN voice Brass Section polyphonic LAYER voice Sweet Trump monophonic E LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released the same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment For example if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings the strings part sustains adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment soun
46. button from any of the following displays CHD 1 16 SysEX or LYRICS page 105 page 107 Calls up the Main Filter Stith display For more Select the check box of the event to be Enters checkmarks tor ali disrlased information on each event Spee ee Tene type refer to the separate E Change l W Froaran Change Data List booklet MIDI Pitch Bend Data Format Aiter Touch O Sveten Exclusive HessageiFi Selects only note data Calls up the Control S a de i checkmarks for all other i A ne bandture i Change Filter display For Score Start Bar boxes are removed Key Signature more information on each mi event type refer to the Code Reverses the checkmark separate Data List booklet Lyric settings for all boxes In MIDI Data Format other words this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un checked and vice versa Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display For more information on each event type refer to the separate Data List booklet MIDI Data Format EXIT g 7 y Enters removes the checkmark for the selected item Selects the item scrolling up down one item at a time When MAIN FILTER or ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER is selected these select the i item scrolling up down to the top or the bottom When CONTROL CHANGE FILTER pressing the EXIT button is selected these select the item scrolling up do
47. call up and store files voice files The PSR 2000 1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section D NOTE When JAPANESE is selected for the Lan guage parameter pages 45 151 and you change this to one of the western lan guages the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in the disk drive are VOICE ARAIN changed to western characters In the oppo tt GE AAI cen Pee marks are changed into normal characters Also in the case of floppy disk data text in the files are changed to characters that can not be read by the instrument Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating system In general be careful when switching languages you risk not being able to access the data properly Select PRESET USER or FLOPPY DISK by using the BACK NEXT button HSER EP EERBBR ELH Me Rock Piano mm Midi Grand b Pianano amp Harpsichord Peretti ts ta D NOTE Double clicking the appropriate A J button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display OOOOOnDA JUG Use the 1 7A buttons to Select the file folder turn the pages There are two ways to select the file folder e
48. can also select the desired section for recording by pressing appropriate panel button Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display from which you can change sections by using the 6A W 7A V buttons To actually enter the change press the SA button To select the Fill In section press the AUTO FILL IN button C chord note C R recommended note recommended notes this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results Other notes may work providing you use them as short passing tones When recording to the Chord or Pad channels use only the notes of the CM7 chord this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results Other notes may work providing you use them as short passing tones The source chord is set by default to CM7 however you can change this to any chord you prefer Refer to the section Making Style File Format Settings Parameter on page 116 e When recording Intro and Ending sections you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord progressions you like In this case if you set the NTR parameter to ROOT TRANSPOSE and NTT to HARMONIC MINOR or MELODIC MINOR in the PARAMETER page the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled for playback meaning that the accompaniment pitch con
49. depending on the particular pedal you ve connected to the FOOT PEDAL 1 2 jack For example pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on while pressing a different make brand of pedal may turn the function off If necessary use this setting to reverse the operation PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Pedal controllable Functions VOLUME Allows you to use a foot controller FOOT PEDAL 2 only to control the volume SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain Releasing the pedal immediately stops damps any sustained notes SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here only the first note will be sustained the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal This makes it possible to sustain a chord for example while other notes are played staccato SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played It only applies to certain voices PIANO for example GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released PORTAMENTO The portamento effect a smooth slide between notes can be produced while the pedal is pressed Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style i e a note is played while the preceding note is still held The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display page 123 PITCHB
50. e When the AUTO FILLIN button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing fill in accompaniment will immediately start playing continuing with the Main section e You can begin the accom paniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section In this case the auto accompaniment doesn t stop when the ending is finished e f you select a different style while the style is not playing the default tempo for that style is also selected If the accompa niment is playing the same tempo is maintained even if you select a differ ent style e When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompani ment is not playing you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accom paniment section in the keyboard page 138 D NOTE You can also use the SYNC STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment section left hand range briefly page 138 J NOTE Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Key board Al Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off PSR 2000 1000 Selecting Intro and Ending Types INTRO ENDING J NOTE To call up the MAIN dis play first press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the EXIT button pees g ETE UPPER pg pp SPLIT FOSE OCTAVE POINT Fe SONG d d MATH J a ge d d MULTI FAD D fr HeartBeat it Tom Flam IHTRO EHDIHG REGISTRATION BANE e 4bar2
51. edited as required via the corresponding LCD buttons EQ1 through EQ5 Each of the 5 bands can be boosted values or cut values by up to 12 dB Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands simultaneously Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust the Q bandwidth and the FREQ center frequency of the selected band The higher the Q the narrower the bandwidth The available FREQ range is different for each band PSR 2000 1000 127 Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice processing technology to automatically produce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony types are provided In addition to straightforward harmony the PSR 2000 also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and or lead vocal sound For example if you are a male singer you can have the PSR 2000 automatically generate a two part female backup A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible control over the vocal harmony sound J NOTE For details about connecting a microphone see page 152 VH TYPE MIC VOCAL SELECT SETTING OHARMONY TALK O OVER O O
52. flatted fifth 7 5 Seventh augmented 7aug 1 3 45 7 Seventh suspended fourth 7sus4 1 4 5 7 e For FINGERED FIN GERED ON BASS and Al FINGERED if you play any three adjacent keys including black keys the chord sound will be can celed and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing Chord Cancel function This let you play back only the rhythm e Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accom paniment based only on the root e A perfect fifth 1 5 pro duces accompaniment based on the root and the fifth e The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence e g some minor chords followed by the minor seventh You can also have the PSR 2000 1000 teach you how to play Fingered chords From the CHORD FINGERING display page 139 specify the chord you want to learn and the notes you should press are indicated in the display Only this voicing inversion is recognized Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion PSR 2000 1000 Arranging the Style Pattern SECTIONS MAIN A B C D INTRO ENDING BREAK The PSR 2000 1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style They are Intro Main Break and Ending By switching among them as you play you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional sounding arrangem
53. folder for moving Select the appropriate file folder and press the 7W OK button The currently selected file folder is highlighted To select another file folder press one of the A J buttons Several files folders can be selected together even those from other pages To release or cancel the selection press the button of the selected file folder again Press the 6V ALL button to select all the files folders in the displayed page USER FLOPPY DISK When the 6V ALL button is pressed the 6V button changes to ALL OFF button to release or cancel the selection Press the 7 VW OK button To stop the operation press the 8V CANCEL button Call up the destination display Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination Wa Press the 4V PASTE button Ei The file folder you cut is now pasted at the destination PSR 2000 1000 J NOTE This operation cannot be used to directly move a file folder from one floppy disk to another If you want to do this cut and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the USER page then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page J NOTE All files folders in a floppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch page 150 J NOTE After being pasted the files are automatically re ordered in alphabetical order and displayed J NOTE About files folders in a flopp
54. ghebvevaaneeceusvecdusendsaaseccatindsessuccasendsessavcasee SEAVEHGE HE cure cece es ALCO TOP HEXT BAHE Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when EE EN EK EN PEACE INSERT DELETE Turns the Registration i reaching the end of the Sequence function through the Registration sequence on off When this is Sequence only the BACK Stop set to ON the NEXT buttons can be used in the MAIN display J NOTE Pressing the NEXT button or the advance pedal has no effect The sequence is lo programmed Registration 7 Sequence is shown at stopped v y the top right of the When both Regist Top Main display and you Pedal and Regist Pedal The sequence starts again at can step through the are set to the same pedal the beginning sequence in this Regist Pedal takes Next Bank display by using the priority The sequence automatically BACK NEXT moves to the beginning of the buttons or the pedals next Registration Memory bank in the same folder Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the Indicates the Registration Memory preset Sequence numbers in the order of the current Registration Sequence Deletes the number at the D NOTE cursor position Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank file To save your new
55. less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc 9 and 11 chords cannot be played PSR 2000 1000 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode Example for C chords CM7 cm7 bind Cm7 C62 Cb5 cm7 gt e e Cm7 Cm7 Cm Cmm7 gt Cdim Cdim7 C7 C73 c7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Csus2 D NOTE Chord Name Abbreviation Normal Voicing Display for root C 5 e Notes in parentheses can Major M 1 3 5 C be omitted C E gt san ooo i oee Major seventh ninth M7 1 2 3 5 j 7 CM7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh M7 1 2 3 4 5 70r1 2 3 4 5 7 CM7 Major seventh flatted fifth M7 gt gt 1 3 5 7 Major seventh augmented M7aug 1 3 5 7 Minor seventh m7 1 3 5 57 Minor seventh ninth m7 1 2 53 5 70r 3 7 2 Minor seventh eleventh m71 Minor major seventh ninth mM7 Minor seventh flatted fifth m7 gt gt Minor major seventh flatted fifth mM7 gt 1 3 gt 5 7 1 Diminished seventh dim7 3 55 6 Seventh 7 1 3 5 gt 70r1 3 5 7 Seventh flatted ninth 7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth 7919 1 3 5 6 7 Seventh ninth 77 1 2 3 5 70r3 7 2 Seventh add sharp eleventh 797 1 2 3 4 5 gt 70r1 2 3 4 5 Seventh add thirteenth 779 1 3 5 6 gt 70r3 6 7 Seventh
56. located on the bottom of the prod uct The model number serial number power require ments etc are located on this plate You should record the model number serial number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date cor worm PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference N WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply AC power adaptor e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument e Use the specified adaptor PA 300 or an equivalent recom mended by Yamaha only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating e Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it e Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a posi tion where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it e Do not open t
57. manually ag Rats gg Meer o Net SONG dred i MAIH Indicates the current tempo for the Newsong ge crandPiano ag selected song accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back When nothing is playing back stopped this Tom Flam indicates the tempo for the selected INTRO ENDING REGISTRATION BAKE style When the song and style are Abar2 Abar NewBank played back simultaneously the wae ELE eee tempo of the style is automatically mn ae ome changed to match the tempo of the song and is displayed here This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style MULTI FAD Indicates the default initial tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style unless the tempo has been changed manually J NOTE Hitting the TAP TEMPO button produces a tapping sound You can change this sound if desired page 149 D NOTE You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped tap the TAP TEMPO button several times and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped While a song is set to Sync Start stand by page 60 76 tapping the TAP TEMPO button starts the song playback in the same manner For songs and styles in 2 4 and 4 4 time tap four times for 3 4 time tap three times fo
58. of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording select a song or turn the power off J NOTE To pause press the SONG START STOP button To resume recording press the SONG START STOP but ton again J NOTE You can also use the metro nome click as a guide while recording The sound of the metronome is not recorded Z CAUTION Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance If you wish to save the recording make sure to store it to internal mem ory USER drive or floppy disk page 38 44 PSR 2000 1000 gt Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Recording Individual Notes Step Record This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one without having to perform them in real time This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately Operation 1 Select an existing song page 76 78 to which you want to add parts or re record If you want to create a new song simultaneously press the RECORD button and the TOP button Press the A button to call up the Song Creator display Press the DIGITAL RECORDING button SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDING Using the BACK NEXT buttons select the 1 16 tab for recording melodies and other parts or select the CHD Chord tab for recording chords
59. off ii EEE TH is the abbreviation of Threshold This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied RATIO This adjusts the compression ratio OUT Adjusts the final output level E VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data the notes you play on the keyboard and or the notes of the song data This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony e SONG CHANNEL MUTE PLAY When set to MUTE the channel selected below is muted turned off during keyboard performance or song playback OFF Song data control over harmony is turned off 1 16 When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer the note data recorded to the assigned song channel controls the harmony e KEYBOARD OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony BALANCE This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal your own voice and Vocal Harmony Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal When this is set to L lt H63 L Lead Vocal H Vocal Harmony only the Vocal Harmony is output when it is set to L63 gt H only the lead vocal is output MODE All of the Voca
60. on setting the split point Split Point ro Gp ae Auto Accompaniment section Quick Guide eeecsercececrrereecevrerececeererececee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 3 Turn SYNC START on SYNC START 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the style starts For this example play a C major chord as shown below Split Point dad bd Auto Accompaniment section 5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO at b gt buttons if necessary Simultaneously press the TEMPO at p gt buttons to return the tempo to its original setting Press the EXIT button to leave the TEMPO display 6 Try playing other chords with your left hand For information on how to enter chords see Chord Fingerings on page 62 7 Press the STYLE START STOP button to stop the style And there s much more Check out these other style related features e Easily create your own original styles page 87 Playing Styles J NOTE The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the TAP TEMPO button page 51 e Set up your favorite panel settings including styles voices and more and call them up whenever you need them page 84 Embellish and enhance your melodies with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand based on the chords you play with y
61. page 25 E VOICE MAIN 3 1 Select the j memory location of Ea Rotor E km Jazz Organ the voice ES Rock Organ 2 Rock Organ2 PRESET USER E Dance Organ FLOPPY Ee Gospel Org Ee Full Rocker DISK Eel Purple Org Esl Elec Organ F 3 3 Select the voice 3 2 Select the various pages Press this to start the in the current eg ey ey sh el demo of the selected voice group voice To stop the demo at any time press this button again Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group Play the keyboard to hear the R Press this to return selected ADE tothe MAIN x voice NINA display Voice Characteristics The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name Live PSR 2000 only These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo to produce a truly authentic rich sound full of atmosphere and ambience Cool These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming Sweet These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha s sophisticated technology and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural you ll swear you re playing the real thing Drum Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard SFX Various special ef
62. page 44 The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears For details on this display see below REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank REGIST are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green From this screen you can select name or delete the Registration Memory presets Select Press the A J buttons The REGIST display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display the related button turns on indicator is red This operation is the same as that in Naming Files and Folders page 41 in Basic Operations Organizing Your Data This operation is the same as that in Deleting Files Folders page 43 in Basic Operations Organizing Your Data D NOTE The result of the Name Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION BANK display by pressing the 8V UP button and save the data page 44 PSR 2000 1000 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory Recalling a Registration Memory Setup You can recall all of the panel settings you ve made or only those you specifically want or need For example if you de select STYL
63. play along instantly following the chords you play Try selecting some of the different styles refer to separate Data List Style List and play them STYLE CONTROL a MAIN j ENDING SYNC SYNC O ACMP O BREAK O INTRO O O O O Irit O STOP START START STOP L JL JU J L J ol J ma 0 A P EHD ORGAN amp O REC TOP OSTARTISTOP REW FF ET IANO amp HARPSI O E PIANO ACCORDION CUSSI SOUND CREATOR uan o 1 J ore lt e 7 a F Te sa me san as pe con n E c en O aGumaR BASS BRASS OWOODWIND 7 SWINGA MARCHA Oporarock O YA omaLroom O WALTZ 5 s c MING consol LE LEFT 0 STRINGS Ocnomarap SYNTH xe sens a o gt omme Oaomame o swm o a O BALLAD O DANCE O LAN USER r d PRAT ED gt o user a s C ICICI fii Xe A PAE 9988 Se DL LE SWING amp MARCH amp OPOP amp ROCK JAZZ OBALLROOM O WALTZ C O BALLAD O DANCE O LATIN O USER
64. position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the PSR 2000 1000 for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet D NOTE Before you switch your 2000 1000 on or off first turn down the vol ume of any connected audio equipment Press the STANDBY ON switch gt The main display appears in the display BE STANDBY ON When you re ready to turn off the power press the STANDBY ON switch again gt Both the display and the drive lamp at the bottom left of the drive will turn off Adjusting the display contrast If the LCD is difficult to read adjust the contrast with the LCD CONTRAST knob on the rear panel A LCD CONTRAST Setting the volume Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level MASTER VOLUME i _ FADE O IN OUT Music Stand The PSR 2000 1000 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel The Panel Logos The logos printed on the PSR 2000 1000 panel indicate standards formats it supports and special features it includes GENERAL GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM compatible tone generator or synthesizer fr
65. pressing the STYLE START STOP button While the song is playing insert a break or change sections with the STYLE section buttons Fill in patterns play when you switch sections WU Eno The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped D NOTE Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles For these songs the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback PSR 2000 1000 O Song Playback Playing Back Songs on Disk Insert the disk into the drive D NOTE Before proceeding make sure to read the section Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disk page 7 D NOTE You can set whether or not the PSR 2000 1000 auto matically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted page 150 D NOTE Some song data for the PSR 2000 1000 has been recorded with special free tempo settings During play back of such song data the measure numbers shown in the display will not corre spond to the actual measure this only serves as a refer ence as to how much of the song has been played back D NOTE Songs containing a large Insert the disk shutter side first and label face up The method for playing back is the same as in the Playing the Internal Songs instructions page 76 except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display Other Playback related Operations
66. records The record is sorted by song title The record is sorted by style name LE The record is sorted by beat All I Have To Do Is 60 58Beat All Shook Up Jive The record is sorted by tempo Select a Awapola 60 sGtrPop record by At The Hop song title i i Change the order of the records When sorting Black is Black 70 sbisco3 ascending or descending records b Black Hasic Honan RockChatha re NE Add the selected record to Favorite Bookmark page song title USE Blue Suede Shoes Rock amp Roll RECORDS p g the 14V but Boon Boon Booi Boon EuroTrance 149 Show the When you press the H button the Add selected ton to skip up ma sc a ema seams LOCK meine data to the favorite list YES NO message will be or down a deuce displayed Select YES to add the selected page to through the each page FAVORITE page songs alpha betically Search record s Enter the condition of the search in the Simulta MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display page 70 The results of neously press SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the SEARCH 1 or SEARCH 2 the AV but page respectively tons to move the cursor to the first record Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT page 71 display Select a record by style name When for editing the selected record sorting the records by style name press these buttons to move the cursor to the Turn TEMPO LOCK on off TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid next previous s
67. relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac tory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corpo ration of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B OBSERVERA Apparaten kopplas inte ur v xelstr msk llan natet sa lange som den ar ansluten till vagguttaget Aven om sjalva apparaten har stangts av ADVARSEL Netsp endingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt s l enge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt som er t endt ogs selvom der or slukket p apparatets afbryder VAROITUS Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty k ytt kytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta standby For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada
68. set a voice for your keyboard play during recording you Can record voice selections so that the voice changes automati cally during playback page 104 PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Quick Recording This is the easiest recording method perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you re practicing so you can check your progress E When creating a new song 1 O REC TOP O START STOP REW FF performance E When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own SYNG STARTS 1 Select the desired song page 76 78 ORI 2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song If you want to record to the MAIN Layer Left voices make sure to set the MAIN LAYER LEFT buttons to ON Make any other desired settings Reverb Chorus etc as well Simultaneously hold down the REC button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time To record your keyboard performance Press either the TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 button To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance Press the EXTRA TRACKS button ude STYLE L R To stop recording press the REC button again EXTRA TRACK TRACK REC OTRACKS O 2 O 1 Recording starts as soon as
69. that of other instruments M Scale Tune page 135 This determines the particular tuning system or temperament for the instrument This is especially useful for playing period pieces to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras Setting Song related Parameters Song Settings page 137 These allow you to set parameters related to song playback Setting Auto Accompaniment related Parameters Style Setting Split Point and Chord Fingering M Style Setting Split Point page 138 These determine the auto accompaniment related settings and let you set the split point E Chord Fingering page 139 PSR 2000 1000 Od Making Global and Other Important Settings Function This determines the method for playing indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features You can even check how to play the chord since the individual notes are indicated in the display Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard Controller E Pedal page 139 These settings determine how the connected foot pedals including foot controllers and footswitches are used They can be assigned to a variety of functions letting you control operations with your feet such as turning the accompaniment style on off or triggering Fill In patterns E Keyboard Panel page 141 These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard how touch affects volume the on off status of the Modulation w
70. the Multi Pads have only one track channel the track channel cannot be changed O PSR 2000 1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound BE Mixing Console T ae a me D This set of controls miam T a G Le Sm SG lets you adjust the EP pa 2 To Eo balance of the EEE voices and their ste aes LAL i el OD ee ene om reo position as well I as AX pope KK MIXING CONSOLE en SPARE ERE 2 6 Hii as the amount of A AONA TATATATA TATA TE ES effect that is applied 5 Fr wo taleli c SS 4 Meet seoanes to each voice You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the BALANCE button and the CHANNEL ON OFF button page 61 J NOTE You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parame ter except for the VOICE parameter Simulta neously hold down the A J butt
71. the appropriate MIXER display keyboard page 122 e The overall volume is low or no sound is The Master Volume is set too low set it to an appropriate level with the heard MASTER VOLUME dial The volume of the individual parts may be set too low Raise the volume of MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE and SONG in the BALANCE display page 61 Make sure the desired channel is set to ON page 61 78 Headphones are connected disabling the speaker output Unplug the headphones Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON page 145 e Not all simultaneously played notes sound You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR 2000 1000 When this happens the earliest played notes will stop sounding letting the latest played notes sound See page 162 for information on the maximum polyphony e Accompaniment style or Song playback does MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL not start page 146 Make sure to press the appropriate START STOP button To play an accompaniment style press the STYLE START STOP button page 61 to playback a song press the SONG START STOP button page 76 New Song a blank song has been selected Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display page 76 The song has been stopped at the end of the song data Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the TOP button page 78 e The Multi Pads do not play back even when MIDI Clock
72. the disk s write protect tab to the protect position tab open write protect tab open protect position Data backup e For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 150 About the Display Messages A message information or confirmation dialog sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation When such messages appear simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button Oo PSR 2000 1000 J NOTE You can select the desired language from the Help dis play page 49 For this example press the G YES button to execute formatting Table of Contents Introduction ccccccccccccccccces PRECAUTIONS orere 3 ANN 6 About this Owner s Manual and Data List 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Dskuunsmnsespsdssunenennunnnpi 7 About the Display Messages cccesssceeeseeeees 8 Application INGO X csoiscdinesicsecsesacesnscccncsessvataossarstaioos 12 What can you do with the PSR 2000 10007 14 Setting Up the PSR 2000 1000 eee 16 Panel Controls and Terminals scceeeseeee 18 Quick Guide cccccccceee 20 Playing the Demos sssssss ssss esersnvsrsnvensvanenvanenenneese 20
73. the event 000 1 0000 Hane 001 2 0000 Lyrics gt gt Intro containing the 004 3 0037 Lyrics 005 1 0000 Lerics Tuin ro 4 z7 lyric star E en Lae tai Press this button 0061 0000 Lories it to save the newly 2 Move the cursor to neso Lene changed lyric 006 3 0000 Lyrics star 007 1 0000 Lyrics How the word star data 3 Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display from which you can input lyrics From the Lyric display page 45 enter the new word your name J NOTE To actually enter an edited value move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG START STOP but ton Lyrics Events Parameter Description Name Song name Determines the song name This calls up the NAME display from which you can enter the name Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics Code Other controls CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text LF Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics Customizing the Event List Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays To select an event for display checkmark the box corresponding to the event name To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list remove the checkmark so that the box is empty To call up the display below press the H FILTER
74. the ju edited value automatically enters that value Determines the current position of the event being edited For coarse adjustment of the event value For fine adjustment of the event value Note Events Determines the channel to be edited Calls up the Step Recording display page 97 ded 1926PF0 ect g Calls up the Filter display page 107 letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data ee eee Holding this button down st while using the A and B buttons lets you select multiple events Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location If the value at the cursor has been changed pressing this restores the original value Copies all selected events The copied events can be pasted to another location J NOTE To actually enter an edited value move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG START STOP but ton Cuts deletes all selected events The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location Deletes the event at the cursor position Adds a new event to the Event List Parameter Description Note Determines the pitch velocity volume and length of the note Ctrl Control change Determines the control change number and value For details on control c
75. the style is not playing Auto Accompaniment and Sync Start will automatically be turned on For details about the One Touch Setting parameters refer to the separate Data List Parameter Chart 4 Stop the Auto Accompaniment STYLE CONTROL MAN ENDING O ACMP O BREAK INTRO o l O Ir O STOP O START O START STOP AUTO OTS fa bs JADE MS ee p 5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups page 68 ONE TOUCH SETTING man TT PSR 2000 1000 Oo Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections OTS Link The convenient OTS One Touch Setting Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section A D 1 ie When you switch among the Main sections A NN D the corresponding One Touch Setting will be called up automatically The Main sections A B C and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1 2 3 and 4 respectively E To cancel the OTS Link function press the OTS LINK button again Setting setup parameters refer to the separate Data List Parameter Chart Set up the panel controls Press the MEMORY such as selecting a voice button as required 4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons 1 through 4 ONE TOUCH SETTING O O O The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice Harmony Multi Pad and
76. to CONNECTION and changed when the VARIATION button is on Determines the effect block VALUE is set to Insertion or when BLOCK is set to DSP2 4 PSR 2000 Determines the effect category Determines the value of the selected parameter Determines the effect type Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted BLOCK PSPZILAVERI CATEGORY REVERB TYPE HALL3 Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored The number of memory spaces J NOTE Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect param eters while playing the instrument Calls up the display for naming the User Effect page 45 Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location SYSTEM for future recall To call up the effect select USER from the CATEGORY available for the destination differs for each block refer to the chart below Effect Block ene All parts ane All parts Main Layer Left Song Ch 1 16 MIC PSR 2000 only Style DSP2 4 PSR 2000 only Main Layer Left Song Ch 1 16 MIC automatically assigned DSP 1 PSR 2000 DSP PSR 1000 parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter Characteristics Number of User Effect Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in 3 a concert hall or jazz club Produces a rich fat sound as if
77. w 2 MODULATION WHEEL ww wT hd 3 ITRAHSPOSE ASSIGH KEYEDARD 1 Press one of the TRANSPOSE buttons TRANSPOSE C L RESET TRANSPOSE KEYBOARD 2 A TRANSPOSE pop up window selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN appears TRAHSPOSE TRAHSPOSE TRAHSPOSE EEYBOARD SOG HASTER UM an 9 se O og 1 ie 3 Adjust the value by using the TRANSPOSE buttons Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the ND KEYBOARD For this setting Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard played voices Main Layer and Left and the accompaniment styles EXIT button SONG e Selectively Transposing Keyboard Song For this setting Transpose affects only the pitch of These settings can be used to match both the song and your the songs keyboard performance to a certain key For example let s say MASTER you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song por tas Sots ene pee eee enone The song data is in F but you feel most comfortable singing in D entire instrument keyboard voices accompaniment styles and songs and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C To match up the keys keep the Master Transpose setting at 0 set the Keyboard Transpose to 2 and set Song Transpose to 3 This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key J NOTE The transpose function does not affect the Drum K
78. will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially available dry type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks PSR 2000 1000 amp About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight extremely high or low temperatures or excessive humidity dust or liquids Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields such as those produced by televisions speakers motors etc since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk rendering it unreadable Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location To protect your data Write protect Tab e To prevent accidental erasure of important data slide
79. 000 also allows you to determine how the received data is played back page 147 HM System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device Message Name PSR 2000 1000 Operation Panel Setting System Exclusive Effect type settings Mixing Console Message etc Realtime Messages Clock setting Start stop operation The messages transmitted received by the PSR 2000 1 000 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR 2000 1000 e MIDI templates preset MIDI setups for various applications page 145 e Transmit page 146 e Receive page 147 e Local Control page 145 e Clock page 146 M Record performance data 1 16 channels using the PSR 2000 1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer such as a personal computer After recording edit the data with the sequencer then play it again on the PSR 2000 1000 playback PSR 2000 1000 MIDI receive MIDI IN f Os MIDI OUT O MIDI OUT MIDI IN E ET gt MIDI transmit MAA AA Personal cumputer QY series etc When you want to use the PSR 2000 1000 as an XG compatible multi timbral tone genera
80. 000 1000 to the default setting Er Restoring the Factory programmed Settings of the PSR 2000 1000 System Reset on page 151 Displaying the Messages EE About the Display Messages on page 8 TOUDE ee EEE EEE EE page 160 PSR 2000 1000 What can you do with the PSR 2000 10007 DEMO Explore the Demos page 20 52 These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument they introduce you to the various functions and features and give you hands on experience using the PSR 2000 1000 Multi Pads Add spice to your performance with special dynamic phrases page 73 118 By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard SONG Playback previously recorded songs page 21 36 75 Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks SONG METRO D REPEAT O NOME EXTRA TRACK TRACK OTRACKS O 2 O 1 STYLE L R REC TOP O START Ey NEW SONG SYNC START A DIGITAL SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDIN FR SWING amp OPOP amp ROCK O JAZZ MIXIy CONSG O BALLAD O DANCE TAP TEMPO ES ans 0 L E ETE
81. 106 VOICE PART ON OFF LAYER button 19 56 System Messages ccccccssceseesscesseseccsecssecseecsecsscessesseessesaeens 158 VOICE PART ON OFF LEFT button 19 56 NN 151 VOICE PART ON OFF MAIN button 19 56 SYSTEM ST fU fj 151 VOD I EE EE O ey Seon eee rr 143 VOL ATTACK Organ Nb occa sanneaponsanhidersnnaretoneesssanceoeats 91 T VOLUME HARMONY uu cece ceceececceceeeesescceeseseesessesessees 90 TACK DUON Scccczbscnncncccsdactancseesoasinnancaidiossacenaiawnoeusaseaanie 19 128 ak ae FEN A FN Eee laa olume VOL Organ Flutes rrrrrrrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrennnnn 91 HEG e leer EE terre Troms RE ERE 149 volumea e 122 TAP TEMPO DURON gcicsdiesecescecdscascessidessatcctelecieiicatcencenss cot TN TEMPO A B buttons oo eee eceeccecceceeeeecees 18 50 Ww TOM Nr 70 U Tempo Indications MAIN Display se 51 WeerCkMeiSter ccccccccecccccscecceccceccececeeceececcececeeceseeseecesens 136 OA 70 What You Can Do With MIDIuespnemmmesesddnaentnd 158 TO HOST terminal cccccccccccecececcccccecccececeeececeeeee 15 19 154 ET EE EEE 155 TO HOST F N 154 TOP 18 78 X TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR MIC aeee 132 Jr TOVE DU NY cea teenie FN EEE renee teers 17 159 TOUCH SENSE Sound Creator ccccecceccececcecesceceececees 88 q PSR 2000 1000 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America hereafter referred to as Yamaha warrants to the original co
82. 112 chora2 This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining 222 various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles For z snis rase example if you want to create your own original 8 beat style you could take rhythm patterns from the 8 Beat 1 style use the bass pattern from 8 Beat 2 and import the chord patterns from the 60 s 8 Beat style combining the various elements to create one D NOTE Any voice can be selected for the RHY1 channel with the E Editing the created Accompaniment Style page 113 exception of Organ Flutes With the editing features you can custom edit the styles you ve created by real time recording step recording and assembling from other styles q PSR 2000 1000 accompaniment style Style File Format The Style File Format SFF combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single unified format By using the edit functions you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back This does not apply to the rhythm tracks The basic or source pattern in the chart is the original style data This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording see below As shown in the chart at right the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes played in Aut
83. 3 is selected In all cases A types produce minimum effect B types produce medium effect and C types produce maximum effect PSR 2000 1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator E Dynamics Use these to select the desired edit operation HERE f BS SEHREY i FEE PTE EEB CHAHHEL ALL 1 GROOVE oan B Dynamics changes the accented beats G k lettins you emphasize the downbeats or create 3 lik ta ED ressae like accents E C E gt a Executes the Dynamics operation After the MER roa Fas fia operation is completed this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Dynamics results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone BAR 1 py EXECUTE ACCENT TYPE STREH EXPAN BOOSTS L OFF o 6TH r COHP CUT SEEAT OH SEEAT OFF 100 100 100 CHAHHEL 16BEAT OH Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied below Dynamics parameters Accent Type Selects the type of accent Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type above will be applied The higher the value the stronger the effect Expands or compresses the range of velocity values around a central velocity value 64 Values higher than 100 expand the dynamic range while values lower than 100 compress it Boost Cut Boost
84. 4 When the Style part is selected neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected When the Song part is selected User voices cannot be selected PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track A setting of O pans the sound hard left while 64 is at center and 127 is at hard right VOLUME Determines the level of each channel giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts ALL REVOICE MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART Replaces all of the replaceable AUTO REVOICE SETUP XG voices with the rich and VOUCE HAHE REVOICE TO aL authentic voices of the PSR EL PIAHDO 1 COOL E PIAHO 2000 1000 BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song REVDIGE T ALL HO COOL E PIAHD REVOICE HO REVOICE VOICE HAHE ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings Selects the XG voices to be replaced voices usually used when playing back PSR 2000 1000 Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON J NOTE The RHY2 categories in the STYLE PART display are only for the Drum Kit SFX Kit percussion voice D NOTE The RHY1
85. 4 V buttons to select a record by song title 3 Play along with the style playback Split Point gy Auto Accompaniment section Press the EXIT button to return to the MAIN display J NOTE You can also have the voice and other important settings change automatically with the style changes To do this turn on OTS LINK page 68 and set the OTS LINK TIM ING page 138 to REAL tenn eee eee cence eee e een ene e eee encene eee cencsnccsacencs Quick Guide ED Music Finder Searching the Music Finder Records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria 1 Press the MUSIC FINDER button MUSIC FINDER 2 Press the I button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display SORT BY HUSIG E0 8Beat Jive 60 sGtrPor SORT ORDER ASGEHDING Black is Black Black Hasic Honan TO sbiscod RockChatha j HUHBER OF 186 RECORDS Blaue It On The Boo PiscoCheceol Blue Suede Shoes Rock amp Roll Boon Boon Boon Boon Eurolrance TEHPO LOGE TEHPOLOCE C cs av Joe MUSIC FINDER SEARCH I e A CLEAR 4 For this example press the A B GEN c button to call up c GET the display for D TAI 224 2 4 ded 6 8 OTHER l ee the SoG SEARCH aren m g AVORIT
86. 50 Tel 053 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH Siemensstrabe 22 34 25462 Rellingen F R of Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 1 1 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 0661 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 703 0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 11 Ubi Road 06 00 Meiban Industrial Building Singapore Tel 65 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 10F 150 Tun Hwa Northroad Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 2713 8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 121 60 61 RS Tower 17th Floor Ratchadaphisek RD Dindaeng Bangkok 10320 Thailand Tel 02 641 2951 THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group
87. 6 PDA OTEA EE SE 136 Q VU vr 81 O EE RE NTE 102 115 JE DIZE errs ermine eae en ohn da aiaee 102 Quick Recording user 93 VRI 137 D SEE EN 137 R Realtime Recording avd beregn 110 Realtime Recording Characteristics rrrrrrrrrrnnnrrrrnnnnrvrrrnn 108 MN 18 92 MON br E 101 TEEN 00 EE 101 FE ler 101 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup rrrrrrnnrrrrrrrrrrrrennnn 86 Recalling the Registered Settings c cssssececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 86 GE EE TE EE EA EE 147 JEG 0 EEE 146 Receiving MIDI aa siinseist 147 15100110 ERE EEE PE EE EE ETA 69 RECORD EDI escrsecs ccs etces ouin a tetera 71 FS COINS EE EE 37 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment 99 Recording Individual Notes sseeseeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 96 Recording No 98 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs 92 Registering Panel SUP 84 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting 68 REGISTRATION EDIT display ssasentrisverdnectsanvesaatdeddeestataqaennes 85 EAN MEMOD vask 84 REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons 19 84 REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS 84 KRANS 142 Regular Voice Parameters rrrnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnsrnssnne 88 GE EE ER 89 NS OA 3 RE EE R A 115 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Eee PENG 18 79 JE oe EN E 71 KONAN vaare 89 Response RESP Organ Flutes rrrrrrrrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnrrnnnnn 91 Restoring t
88. 6 note triplet J 1 8 note f a 1 16 note 3 3 3 I 1 8 note triplet f3 1 16 note triplet The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks are exceptionally convenient since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time without compromising the quantization of either one For example if you have both straight 1 8 notes and 1 8 note triplets recorded to the same channel and you quantize to straight 1 8 notes all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1 8 notes completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm However if you use the 1 8 note 1 8 note triplet setting both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly Oo PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel Use these to select the desired edit operation Deletes all data in the selected channel After the operation is completed this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone Mix m geh gt 4 CHANEL TRANSPOSE O O S 5ET uP J e Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data These select the channel to be deleted This function lets you mix the data of two channels and p
89. 70000 Sect 01 1 0000 Chord G MAIN 01 1 0000 Tenpo f G a 2 ell ANN oe dm a NANA 20 200 002 0000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right 002 1 000 Press the BREAK button to specify the Break section and enter the chords as shown at right MAINA BREAK DE ie en t 001 1 0000 Str Beathodern t G t G7 BREAK INTRO Tn I 002 3 000 ll Fv 3 IV oven BAR a GLE 003 maA Fa ran Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator 4 Press the MAIN B button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right dd ZPPA BREAK MAIN B 01 1 0000 Sect H A Hain A 01 1 50000 Chord G 01 1 0000 Tenpo 01 3 0000 Chord F 02 1 0000 Chord 6 02 35 0000 Chord 02 35 0000 Sect F Br Break OF 4 0000 Chord 6 03 1 0000 Chord 00371 0000 Sect Han 005 1 0000 End BAR BEAT GLE 003 2 a000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right E Play back the newly created chord progression Use the C A button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song and press the SONG START STOP button to hear the newly entered notes To actually enter the recorded data press the EXIT button The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR CHD display pa
90. 73476 Transmitting MIDI Data esororrrrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnrnvrnnnnnnnnnnnne 146 Sone eC ON CIN EEE EE EE 92 TRANSPOSE TA T gt buttons seede 18 141 TN Mn 137 TTO EA E E E 141 GA ERE EEE 69 Me 123 SORT ORD Era EA ane enoneaees 69 TINN EE E E E N E A ES 123 SOUND SOUND CREATOR ecceccececceceececcecseecesceces 89 Ts the Pre 135 SOUND CREATOR button usuksmseassamesssesagesiserpsese 18 87 TYPE HARMONY EE 90 TONN 116 SEG EE 103 U SOURCE2 EE ennen esteeseen 103 ETa 19 58 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory URIN 39 EE EEE NN 142 USER EET AA OP a inan 151 Pl 90 User Effect Mixing Console 125 SPEED HARMONY ccccccseccceecccceecccesecscusecceeeescseuesseaeess 90 Usi Mi h 128 ee sing a Microphone sxaccutactsaecooreesosssduexencsamansntaenesseaannensnaun ER EE E 138 Using the Music Finder 33 STANDBY ON Switch ererrnnnrrnnnnrrnnrnnrnrrnsrnnsnnrnnsner 14 18 17 Usine the USB onou a aa START SEARCH sisirin ens 70 ee ee so 96 with a USB MIDI interface UX256 etc ccc eee cena ee 155 EEE Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices 152 BLE Record C NOTO EET 99 Utility 148 FS 9g Utility sees tees teeeeseeeeseeeessnneeessnnecesnnseecssnneecennnceessnsees BESO RONG 111 V STOP ACMP apene eseina AAE EENE EEN 138 STOP button MULTI PAD cece eee eeceeccecceceecceceees 18 73 VARIATION button oo cece ccc cecccecceesccesseeceeeceeecenneens 19 58 Stopping t
91. Best for players with a Selects the desired parameter Keyboard M l 1 KEYBOARD TOUCH HORHAL heavy touch Touch Modulation MODULATION HHEEL HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for Wheel PSR 2000 or la rennseose nssren kevaonne higher volume Transpose Assign c E gt NORMAL Standard touch response SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength SOFT 2_ Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength Best for players with a light touch Determines the Touch sensitivity setting Keyboard Touch only refer to the table at right D NOTE The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity TOUCH SENSE For example to play a pipe organ voice most authentically you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch page 88 Determines the fixed volume level when touch is set to off Keyboard Touch only Determines whether Touch and Modulation Wheel controls are on or not for the corresponding parts Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the TRANSPOSE button en CONTROLLER ccc EE Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard played voices accompaniment style playback and song data in semitone units EX a keveonrp toucu worma
92. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here Naturally these files are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive YOICE MAIN PRESET f Roc BrightPians a Harpsicherd a GrandHarpsi Me Honky Tonk ME my Piano amp Harpsichori Changes drives among PRESET USER and FLOPPY DISK Calls up the upper level directory page In this example the og i voice folder selection Bd ER i page can be called up File All data both pre programmed and your own original are stored as files Current Memory Current Memory is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function Your edited voice should then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive Recording songs page 92 and creating accompaniment styles page 108 are done within the current memory Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or files The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving PSR 2000 1000 Selecting Files and Folders Select a file shown in the display In this example we ll select a voice file First press the VOICE PIANO amp HARPSI button to call up the display containing the files This display Open Save display is typical of those used to
93. D disk stores up to1 44 MB megabytes The figures 720 KB and 1 44MB indicate the data memory capacity They are also used to indicate the format type of disk e Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Sequence Format The system which records song data is called sequence format Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device The PSR 2000 1000 is compatible with the following formats E SMF Standard MIDI File This is the most common sequence format Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types Format 0 or Format 1 Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0 and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0 e The PSR 2000 1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 e Song data recorded on the PSR 2000 1000 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0 e Song data loaded to the PSR 2000 1000 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format E ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the PSR 2000 1000 series instruments This is a common format used with various Yamaha software E XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI File format with greater functionality and open ended expandability for the future e The PSR
94. DAL 2 only UP DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines whether the pitch change goes up is raised or down is lowered RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines the range of the pitch change in semitones ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all available drum kits are shown here letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all sounds of the selected drum kit in KIT above are shown here This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal For best results use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller O PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose Keyboard Panel Keyboard Touch Modulation Wheel The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength These settings allow you to customize the keyboard s touch response sensitivity to your personal playing preferences You can also set whether the Modulation wheel is effective or not for each individual keyboard part CONTROLLE Requires strong playing to produce high volume
95. DI cables are connected properly There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard Some voices have a looping sound Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches depending upon the voice The voice produces excessive noise The sound is distorted or noisy A strange flanging or doubling sound occurs Also the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played Sing as closely to the microphone as possible Use a directional microphone Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part Separate the microphone from the instrument s speakers as much as possible Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display page 130 Increase the microphone input level TH in the Compressor function from the MICROPHONE SETTING display page 130 Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode See page 131 Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard fingering modes Select an appropriate fingering mode page 62 This is normal recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI page 155 The MIDI terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parame
96. DI settings for computer and sequence software you are using refer to the relevant owner s manuals What s MIDI Let s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the guitar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production N c intemal amp pr TE A N Playin the Keyboard Based on playing information from the keyboard a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrument the sampled note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on information received from the keyboard and output through the speakers PSR 2000 1000 O Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Now let s examine what happens when we play back a recording When you playback a music CD for example a solo piano recording you re hearing the actual sound vibrations in air of the acoustic instrument This is called audio data to distinguish it from MIDI data Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument audio data Recording Playback
97. E in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display page 85 Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button any whose indicators are green to recall the desired settings J NOTE You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence in any order you desire Once programmed the presets 1 8 can be selected in sequence with the BACK NEXT buttons or the pedal page 142 REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY elelee Mark the Sroupls that you want to remain unchanged even when a Registration Memory is selected FREEZE GROUP SETTING GROUP SELECT O HARHOHY F SOHG HARE 1 he j voce id TENPO C HIC SETTIHE om TUHE TRANS PEDAL Ca up the FREEZE O SCALE F HULTI PAD FOFF DAY 7 page from the REGIST SEQUENCE Enters a checkmark FREEZE VOICE SET to the selected box screen page 142 U Select the Freeze settings Removes the checkmark from the selected box Press the FREEZE button When Freeze is active lamp is lit the settings you specified in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged even when changing Registration Memory presets REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY LAA Press
98. E Repeat Rewind Fast forward During playback you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button When playback is stopped pressing this button returns the song to the beginning REC START STOP amount of data may not be o pH able to be read properly by the instrument and as such NEW SO 6 START you may not be able to select them The maximum capacity is about 200 300KB however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display see below To return to the SONG display press the EXIT button SONG POSITION display When BAR is selected you can specify a measure number counted from the beginning of the song by using the REW and FF buttons When PHRASE MARK is selected specify the phrase mark number by using the REW and FF buttons J NOTE Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data SOKG POSITION PHRASE HARE EAR PHRASE MARK is shown only when the song contains phrase marks Press the J button to toggle between BAR and PHRASE MARK then use the REW and FF buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark M Adjusting the Volume Balance Muting Specific Channels O Press this button to call up the BALANCE display page 61 CHANNEL ON OFF wA
99. E SEARCHI SEARCH J 16 llad 16 Beat Por For this example ANY is selected NAL saad Joogi For this example ALL is selected ngagaya Enter the song title then press the 8A OK button Quick Guide e o 00000000 00 00000000 00000000 000 0000 J NOTE The results of Search 1 and 2 appear in the correspond ingly numbered SEARCH 1 2 displays J NOTE Refer to page 45 for instruc tions on entering characters Press the F G and H to clear the previous conditions if necessary Press the 8A START SEARCH button The search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words Music Finder 7 Select a record see step 2 on page 33 and play along with the style playback TNE Split Point v gg NN LI Auto Accompaniment section Press the EXIT button to return to the MAIN display You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk pages 38 and 44 In this way you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other PSR 2000 1000 users For details refer to page 71 Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data To save your Music Finder data call up the MUSIC FINDER Open Save window from SEGA the SYSTEM RESET page page 151 of the UTILITY display and follow the same Me procedure as that in the Open Save window for Voice page 40 44 To recall the sav
100. EEZE O O O Oo O O fe MEMORY en re U e J Indicator is green The panel setting is registered but not selected Indicator is red The panel setting is registered and is currently selected Indicator is off The panel setting is not registered D NOTE The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off unless you perform the Save operation explained on the next page PSR 2000 1000 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons are saved as a single file NOTE BANK 01 Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank files and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each All settings registered to buttons 1 8 are referred to as a bank The banks can be saved to USER or FLOPPY DISK as Registration bank files 2 NOTE Press the DIRECT ACCESS button and EXIT button to call up the MAIN display TRAHNS app UPPER SPLIT Ur rise 0 JME OCTAVE 0 my FOIHT G dd 128 50H MATH J NewSong ge STYLE d d 1d5 MULTI PAD Hr HeartBeat Ht Tom Flam INTRO EMDIM G REGISTRATION BAKE Abar Abar NewBank LAHGE 7 2 Save the settings you ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file
101. END Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed FOOT PEDAL 2 only Same as the PITCH BEND wheel MODULATION Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed FOOT PEDAL 2 only Same as the MODULATION wheel DSP VARIATION Same as the VARIATION button HARMONY ECHO Same as the HARMONY ECHO button VOCAL HARMONY PSR 2000 only Same as the VOCAL HARMONY button TALK PSR 2000 only Same as the TALK button SCORE PAGE PSR 2000 only While the song is stopped you can turn to the previous score page one page only SCORE PAGE PSR 2000 only While the song is stopped you can turn to the next score page one page only SONG START STOP Same as the SONG START STOP button STYLE START STOP Same as the STYLE START STOP button TAP TEMPO Same as the TAP TEMPO button SYNCRO START Same as the SYNC START button SYNCRO STOP Same as the SYNC STOP button INTRO Same as the INTRO button MAIN A Same as the MAIN A button MAIN B Same as the MAIN B button MAIN C Same as the MAIN C button MAIN D Same as the MAIN D button FILL DOWN A fill in plays automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left FILL SELF Fill in starts playing BREAK Break starts playing FILL UP A fill in plays automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right ENDING Same as the ENDI
102. FF messages received at the channel s set to ON are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON OFF and split point settings The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Other Settings Utility The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Making Settings for Fade In Out Metronome Parameter Lock and Tap CONFIG 1 Fade In Time Fade Out Time Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out HETROHOHE VOLUHE 100 SOUHD EELL OH TIHE SIGHATURE d d 3 PARAHETER LOCK TAP PERCUSSTIOH HI HAT CLOSED VELOCITY 30 FADE IN OUT HOLD TIHE Id _oOuT HOLD 5 0 17 0 1 0 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in or go from minimum to maximum range of 0 20 0 seconds Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome related parameters PARAHETER LOCK Al TAP PERCUSSION Hi HatClosed VELOCITY 50 GHATURE 7 BELL OFF BELL OH SI us LEN Vil FAA Determines the level of the metronome sound O PSR 2000 1000 Determines the time the volume is held at 0 foll
103. FLOPPY DISK NG 39 FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN oeseri 150 FIODDY ASK ONYE sconiseaacnmensnousotdcamestwntententalanmestieneracaagueaeess 19 7 FOOT LED Go rere ent ta eee mre ere erent 153 FOOTAGE Organ us sara 91 Footage Organ FIULES RE 91 FOOT PEDAL 1 SWITCH jack orrrrnnnnnrrrrrrrnnrnrnnnnnnr 19 153 FOTEN vev 19 153 KOILE ULL GDS EE 150 FEN 19 86 EE SO 86 142 FORL KEYBOARD FRE EE EE 62 FUNCTION button rrvrvrrvvrnrernnernrnrnrnrnnernruvnnernresenee 18 133 G GE EE EE 97 Nr 70 72 NENNE 72 MENN 17159 GE 113 Groove EE EE ien nei e Enne ari 113 CROCE SELE Oe EE A er or 84 H Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disk 7 gener Geo I REE 89 HAMN 42444 58 90 143 Harmony AEE ssisisoiis sesiones iinis sense 144 me EG EEE EN 144 HARMONY ECHO button eeen 19 58 Headphones EE 152 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following lanQUage cseecccccceeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 49 Hi 18 49 HET NN 117 Ge GE ein ann 19 153 a A OEO AOA EE 135 EN 46 EN 46 INPUT VOLUME knob sses 19 152 Inputting and Editing Lyrics eernnrsvrrrnrrrrrrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnne 107 Instant Selection of Displays rrrrrrrrrrnnrrrrrnnnnnvvrrrrrrrrnnnnnne 47 MR 66 INTRO DON ee cerszecscaxepaaseosseenseencteasesmcars 18 31 64 PSR 2000 1000 O K MODULATION cece cece csc ececcecccscscecececsceceseeesavens 18 58 141 2 MONIER 19 58 Col R EE E
104. FOSE FOIHT Fe FRE SONG d d 128 Ji NewSong ED B ILyries ZHE these are selected from EE tk re ee ED ec MAIN display STYLE d d d 145 MULTI PAD fr HeariBeat M Tom Flam page 151 e SYSTEM SETUP e MIDI SETUP e USER EFFECT e MUSIC FINDER INTRO EHDING REGISTRATION BAHE 4bar Abar NewBank HCE J NOTE If the MAIN screen is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT button Open Save display for Style page 59 Open Save display for Registration Bank page 85 Pop amp Rock Latin Ballad March amp Waltz STYLE handles the Style files PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Example Open Save display for Voice Each Open Save display consists of PRESET USER and FLOPPY DISK drive pages PRESET drive The files that are pre programmed and installed internally to the PSR 2000 1000 are kept here Preset files can be loaded but cannot be re written However you can use a preset file as a basis for creating your own original file which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data created or edited using the various functions of the PSR 2000 1000 They are stored internally to the PSR 2000 1000 FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to floppy disk
105. HTHESS 20 DISPLAY VOICE HUHBER OFF Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display page 54 This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device Determines the brightness of the backlit display PSR 2000 1000 149 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function J NOTE e Copying cannot be done between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk When copying make sure both disk are the same type e Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied e Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks on page 7 Copying and Formatting Disks Disk This function copies all the data another from one disk to another letting you G back up all your important data before editing For instructions see Copying from Disk to Disk below Copy the entire contents of one disk to DISK COPY Format Disk All previous contents will Eg be lost J This function formats a floppy disk see below FLOPPY DISK OHG AUTO OPEN When a floppy disk is inserted the OFF first song on the disk is selected tA cutomatically Tu
106. IDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN es Mac A L MIDI PC 1 e When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer connect the RS 422 terminal of the computer modem or printer terminal to the MIDI interface then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR 2000 1000 as shown in the diagram below Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI MIDI IN RS422 MIDI OUT 6 MINI DIN 8 pin Fi gt oom Mac L MIDI PC 1 e When the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI the TO HOST terminal is disabled e When using a Macintosh series computer set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using For details refer to the owner s manual for the particular software you are using Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB MIDI interface UX256 UX96 etc Connect the UX256 UX96 and the computer with a USB cable Install the included UX256 UX96 driver to the computer and connect the UX256 UX96 to the PSR 2000 1000 with a MIDI cable Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR 2000 1000 to MIDI For details refer to the owner s manual of the UX256 UX96 Personal computer Mac L MIDI PC 1 For details about the necessary MI
107. IHT SONG dd J 1268 Ji NewSong ge CHORD L FFE J NOTE If the MAIN screen at left is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT button 1 NOTE You can also make a variety of other settings Such as tempo voice selection etc and have them automati STYLE ded g 1d6 MULTI PAD Er HeartBeat st Tom Flam INTRO EMDIMG REGISTRATION BANK 4bar Abar NewBank cally called up when you play back the song page 104 D NOTE You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simul taneously pressing the TOP button and the SONG START STOP but ton The song starts as soon as you play the key board You can also use this function along with the Style s Synchro Start func tion page 60 3 NOTE You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song Simply press the FADEIN OUT button at the start of song playback to fade in the song and press it again at the end of the song to fade out 2 1 Select the PRESET tab with the BACK button 2 2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back The song starts Y 3 Eia EXTRA TRACK TRACK MET O 1 O REPEAT O NOME START STOP O TRACKS O 2 ome OG To stop the song immediately press the button again FF O O O O O O Press the J bu
108. If you want to have the notation displayed as you play PSR 2000 only press the C button If you want to see the lyrics press the B button If the MAIN screen is not displayed press the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT button TRANS i UFFER SFLIT ose o Me SAT 0 my FOIHT L SON d d d MATH AP Twinkle Twinklere Live INTRO EHDIH Intro Ending C BAL FEGISTRATIOH BANK NewBank AHCE 7 Press the SONG START STOP button and play the part If you want you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO lt b gt Lo buttons L NEW SONG SYNC START ET Mg 5 Press the SONG START STOP button to stop playback O REC TOP O START STOP 2 LE NEW SONG SYNC START ET O REC TOP O START STOP SS Quick Guide eercsercececercrereececerereceeeeerececee eee e eee eee eo eee eee eee eee eee eee eee oo D NOTE If the selected song does not contain lyric data lyrics are not displayed J NOTE e If you want to start the song right away without an intro use the Sync Start function To set Sync Start to standby simultaneously hold down the TOP button and press the SONG START STOP button Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the melody If you can hear the PSR 2000 1000 playing the melody part as well check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data and change the channel assigned to Tra
109. J gt USER en ee OE mereueo E5 Gt TEN rewro arr eam 0 NO leo ux omme sou O ONE TOUCH SETTING TE ENTER o o o o NE LO 3j 4 I ha y RO EXTRA TRACK TRACK MET O 1 O REPEAT O NOME O TRACKS O 2 2O REGISTRATION MEMORY E DEKT TT STYLE L R O REC TOP O START STOP REW FF Lells NEW SONG SYNC START A Compatible Song Types Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM General MIDI J NOTE Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions and is intended only for your own personal use GENERAL Mil XS Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha s XG format XG is a significant enhancement of the GM system level 1 standard providing more voices greater editing control and support for multiple effect sections and effect types J NOTE For more information on the song file types compatible with the PSR 2000 1000 see page 159 farm Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha s DOC oreHesTRA Disk Orchestra Collection format LL KF Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha s original MIDI file format PSR 2000 1000 Oo Song Playback Song Playback Playing the Internal Songs TRAHS egg UPPER SPLIT Ur rise 0 SME OCTAVE 0 my FO
110. L MIC Use these to change the value for each function or setting For details see below TARA TAUAUAURURG E 3BAND EQ 3 BAND EQUALIZER Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band The PSR 2000 features a high grade three band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound Zee Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band AD en Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB Mm NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level This effectively cuts off extraneous noise allowing the desired signal vocal etc to pass SW SW is the abbreviation of Switch This turns Noise Gate on or off TM TH is the abbreviation of Threshold This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open PSR 2000 Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 E COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level This is useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics It effectively compresses the signal making soft parts louder and loud parts softer OV RE SW is the abbreviation of Switch This turns Compressor on or
111. LTI PA BE Torn Flarn Pi The same as the Open Save Calls up the upper display on pages 41 and 44 level directory page O PSR 2000 1000 Song Playback Here you ll learn how to play back songs Songs include the internal songs of the instrument performances you ve recorded yourself using the recording functions page 92 and commercially available song data You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song You can also display the music notation PSR 2000 only and lyrics in the LCD If you connect a microphone to the PSR 2000 you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have vocal harmony parts added automatically page 128 f 1 EI VOICE EFFECT or ora N ORES THER TUCK omer OM GVAMAHA g ol MEN AO uono o ommmen COD L j O COOSA Sa STYLE U R nmnm SA VOICE o mo 708 MTARTNTOP PEN FF OPANO amp HARPSL O EPANO OAGG N N PERCUSSION SOUND CREATOR N P O C ce lt gt O cuman BASS O BRASS OWOoDWINI EE ao o MRS omumoon o EE E gt C me amine DE magego fn A O BALLAD DANCE O LATIN USER c amp J S E l
112. MASTER VOLUME O T c Z O 3 Oo z EN LTI ir o STOP O START O STAR Sle ed IN OUT Y STYLE CONTROL vAn O ACMP O BREAK O INTRO o I O Eri AUTO _ OTS Je bg BERE ea STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING Record your performances page 92 108 Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment page 28 59 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing Select an accompaniment style such as pop jazz Latin etc and let the PSR 2000 1000 be your backing band Oo PSR 2000 1000 With the powerful and easy to use song recording features you can record your own keyboard performances and create your own complete fully orchestrated compositions which you can then save to the USER drive or a floppy disk for future recall LCD MUSIC FINDER The large LCD together with the various panel buttons provides comprehensive and easy to understand control of the PSR 2000 1000 operations VOICE Call up the perfect accompaniment style page 33 69 If you know what song you want to play but you don t know which style or voice would be right for it let the Music Finder help you Just select the song title and the PSR 2000 1000 automatically calls up the most appropriate style and voice
113. MONY ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 HARMONY ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 HARMONY ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 The explanations here apply to step 3 on page 87 VOLUHE 100 T OCTAVE HAIH LAYER D LEFT 1 PORTAHEHT TIHE 0 HOHD POLY POLY COH PARE TOUGH bd VOLUHE 5ENSE L 100 Set the volume of the current edited T voice was Fis FSS Determines the touch sensitivity or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength 0 Produces more dramatic level drops the more softly you play 64 Normal response 127 Produces high volume for any playing strength fixed PSR 2000 1000 Set the portamento time of each part MAIN LAYER VOICE page 123 This determines whether the voice is played monophonically page 58 Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves When the Main or Layer part s voice is used the M LYR parameter is available when the Left part s voice is used the LEFT parameter is available Editing the voice SOUND CREATOR SOUND The explanations here apply to step 3 on page 87 E FILTER YOICE Grand Pian BBB SOUND fEFFELEERTSBAKARS SOUND CREATORIR EHH HEGE A amp ATTACK 0 DECAV D VIBRATO DEPTH 0 SPEED O DELAY 0 COH PARE FILTER TE ERIGHT HARHO ATTACK DECAY RELES DEP
114. NG rit button FADE IN OUT Same as the FADE IN OUT button FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes page 62 BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed If the fingering is set to FULL KEYBOARD the function does not work PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the 4A V 8A V buttons You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument MAIN ON OFF Same as the MAIN button LAYER ON OFF Same as the LAYER button LEFT ON OFF Same as the LEFT button OTS Calls up the next One Touch Setting OTS Calls up the previous One Touch Setting For best results use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller The parameters below correspond to buttons 2A V 8A V and their availability depends on the selected control Type For example if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type the parameters HALF PEDAL POINT MAIN LAYER and LEFT automatically appear in the display SONG STYLE MIC PSR 2000 These specify the part s that will be affected by the pedal only LEFT LAYER MAIN HALF PEDAL POINT You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working This can be set for certain kinds of pedals such as the foot pedal YAMAHA FC7 FOOT PE
115. Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 053 460 3273 YAMAHA Yamaha PK CLUB Portable Keyboard Home Page English only http www yamahaPKclub com Yamaha Manual Library English versions only http www2 yamaha co jp manual english M D G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2001 Yamaha Corporation 2222222 222AP 2 03C0 Printed in Indonesia
116. OCK ROTARY SP parameter is set to REVERB CHORUS or DSP1 4 DSP press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied It is effective only when BLOCK is set to DSP1 DSP PARAMETER is set to CONNECTION and VALUE is set to Insertion or when BLOCK is set to DSP2 4 PSR 2000 The various effect programs in Type below are grouped into categories This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block PSR 2000 1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console BBEAREEE FER FEB FBRE EFFECT PARAHETER EDIT A BLOCK PSPZ7ILAVERI CATEGORY REVERB TYPE HALL4 PARAHETER DIFFUSION do INITIAL DELAY dd 2us HPF CUTOFF 63Hz LPF CUTOFF PARAHETER VALUE REVERB TIHE L ds This value is sPFlied while the Switches between Panel VARIATION button is on the upper lower BLOCK ORY TYPE PARAMETER VALUE parameters For the Frid lower parameter the depth can be Calls up the 7 display for storing the effect Cd Determines the level of the effect return level This is not available when BLOCK is set to DSP1 DSP PARAMETER is set
117. ONG display from which you can save Use this to select the gt oee r the edited data desired edit operation o Jg S E c Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized If a Executes the Quantize value less than 100 is operation After the selected notes will be operation is completed this CS E peas moved toward the specified button changes to UNDO GE dr quantization beats only by letting you restore the LEGE Dy Jr i the specified amount original data if you re not satisfied with the Quantize results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone Applying less than 100 quantization lets you preserve some of the human feel in the recording Selects the quantize size resolution See the below for the details Selects the desired channel to be quantized HM About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with For example if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes use 1 8 note for the Quantize size If you apply a 1 4 note Quantize size the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1 8 note quantization J Sd dD J 221 2 Quantize Size J 1 4 note fi 1 8 note f 1 16 note f 1 32 note Pr 1 16 note 1 8 note triplet J 1 4 note triplet J 1 8 note triplet f 1 1
118. OR button imveivvverrevrvesvevrrrserverrserrersennnn P 87 DIGITAL RECORDING button srrnrnvrnrrrrrnrnrnnrrnren P 92 108 MIXING CONSOLE button c cceescesesssesseesseeseeseessesseeeseeee P 121 MENU DEMO button vsevvervrevvrvrrvrervvrvreeserveesvevreseesersseessesseennn P 52 HELP button eee P 49 FUNCTION button oc cessceseesseessteseteseessteseeeseeesneen P 133 z a G NAF rey OO a ey a a Mr Mr Re Er TO Dr D Er Er 6 6 MT re ORCHESTRA IL DISPLAY CONTROL A J buttons im umervnvvvvvvveeneie P 40 DIRECT ACCESS button ecccccccsessecssessesssceseseeeseeseteeeeee P 47 BALANCE button oo eesceeccescceseeeseesseesscsseessesseesseeseessesseen P 61 CHANNEL ON OFF button rsrerorrrrnrvrrorvervnvnrrnnren P 61 78 Q 1AV BAV buttons 2 00 ee cre eeteeesteeeeees P 38 45 BACK button ooo eeceecceececeseesseesseeseesseesssessesseesssesseesaseee P 40 46 71 8 NEXT button mm eveevvvevvrvvvvvvvrvvvrvrersersrerreeserssersersseenn P 40 46 VOICE PART ON OFF MAIN button rrnvrrrnrvrrrnvverennrr P 56 VOICE PART ON OFF LAYER button rnervrvrrrnvvrrrnrrn P 56 VOICE PART ON OFF LEFT button rsrersrvrrrnvrrrennrr P 56 amp ENTER button munnen P 46 DATA ENTRY dial ersrrerrnrrrrorrrrrnvrrrnvrrrrnvrrrnnvrrrrrrrrnnnerennen P 46 EXIT butt
119. ORD aa aa Hai ct 6 I GHAHHEL Er M t M Source Root Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern i e the key used when recording the pattern The default setting of CM7 with a Source Root of C and a Source Type of M7 is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data When you change Source Root Chord from the default CM7 to another chord the chord notes and recommended notes will also change depending on the newly selected chord type For details on chord notes and recommended notes see page 111 When the Source Root is C en fm fr um en iro fr Meet belg bbt kilt eee bbt brett C7 5 c79 c7i11 c713 c79 c713 c7 9 BLT eit elles lee ber EEE koblet keee CM7aug C7aug C1 8 C1 5 Csus4 Csus2 chord note ve om Th E NTR Note Transposition Rule and NTT Note Transposition Table e NTR Note Transposition Rule This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern Two settings are available Root Trans Root Transpose When the root note is transposed the pitch relationship between notes is maintained For example the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3 A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines gt IE Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to
120. PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Scale Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts with each half step evenly spaced in pitch This is the most commonly used tuning in music today Pure Major Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale especially for triad chords root third fifth You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies such as choirs and acapella singing Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths which are collapsed into a single octave The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads Mean Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale by making the major third interval more in tune It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century Handel among others used this scale Werckmeister Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems which were themselves improvements on the mean tone and Pythagorean scales The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord Arabic Use these tunings when playing Arabic music P
121. Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON OFF display see below CHANNEL ON OFF display D NOTE Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data The chan nels are assigned as shown below for the PSR 2000 1000 Select the SONG tab with the CHANNEL ON OFF button and mute the desired channel by setting it to OFF To solo a channel only that channel will sound hold down the Song appropriate button corresponding to the channel To release the solo for the channel press 1 16 Accompaniment Style that channel s button again Oo PSR 2000 1000 9 16 Song Playback Muting Specific Parts Track1 Track2 Extra Tracks This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song Track1 Track2 Extra Tracks and play back only those parts you want to hear For example if you want to practice the melody of a song you can mute just the right hand part and play that part yourself J NOTE You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 page 137 letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS buttons EXTRA W TRACK TY TRACK METRO OTRACKSP 2 O 1 O REPEAT O NOM Use this button to turn on off the right hand part D NOTE All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song 1 Select the song to be played back page 75 Use this button to turn on off the additional perfor
122. R 2000 1000 may not function properly When the HOST SELECT switch is set to PC 1 PC 2 or Mac you can use the TO HOST terminal but the MIDI connec tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con nectors On the other hand when the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI you can use the MIDI connectors but not the TO HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter minal Note for Windows users regarding MIDI driver To transfer data via the computer s serial port and the PSR 2000 1000 s TO HOST terminal you need to install a specified MIDI driver Yamaha CBX driver for Windows The Floppy Disk that came with your PSR 2000 1000 contains the compressed driver file mididrv zip After extracting the file execute the installation by double clicking on the Setup exe file in the MidiDrv folder and follow the on screen directions In addition you can download this driver from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site http www yamaha xg com PSR 2000 1000 Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer RS 232C terminal or RS 422 terminal to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR 2000 1000 For the connection cable use the appropriate cable below sold separately that matches the personal computer type Z NOTE If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above your software may require
123. RED with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc Al FULL KEYBOARD For a minor chord simultaneously press the root key For a minor seventh chord simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left D NOTE Chord detection in the Al Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th note intervals Extremely short chords less than an 8th note in length may not be detected D NOTE In Full Keyboard mode chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave those two notes determine the chord If the lowest note and the sec ond lowest note are sepa rated by more than one octave the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave D NOTE Al Artificial Intelligence When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged the PSR 2000 1000 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything anywhere on the keyboard using both hands You don t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD with the exception that
124. RG Ee VC MIS case pecan recreate EEE EE EEE 105 EN NE rey LYRICS LANGUAGE cessessecsessessesssessessessessessesstsstessestessesses 137 Me MP 2 NINE 117 M NOTENE 82 Nl 97 MAN AD Pee 64 NTR Note Transposition Rule rrrrrrarrrrrrrnrnrnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnn 116 NNN 18 64 NTT Note Transposition Table rrrrororrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnn 117 MAIN IB DUOT oenceciadesnaseanosnaneeseasnsatdesosmaeenionteenktaaetiodes 18 64 NUMBER OF RECORDS wisdsciscicdsmmadeiactcsancdwindeuiiaiadanisumdencsecomues 69 MN NG 18 64 MAIN D button eoovrrorrnrnrnnvvrrrnnrvnnnvernnnnrnnnnesennsennnveee 18 64 O A SN ml OE 23 FE Me PN OCTAVE LEFT Sound Creator ccsccscsssssesseesesseestesesstsseeeeeees 88 Making Overall System Settings Local Control Clock etc 145 Makne seiinestor Fade Inout etioname OCTAVE M LYR SN 88 p orlak and T 148 TINN 32 arameter Lock and Tap 1 coeeteneeeneeneecenecnncenes ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 buttons 19 67 68 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number O l See pensave 0 EE ne renter 38 NICS AIG EEE EE SEE 149 Orsan Flutes 15 55 91 Making Settings for the Pedale sn 139 5 Ba FIG ee 55 PEER OE Organ EE 91 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone 130 Groanigine Fi rganizing Files by Creating a New Folder 44 Making Style File Format Settings cceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Orizi E BCA PEE E E A 113 TT 135 ER Dies 111 MASTER VOLUME dial cccscsseessessseeseee
125. SAD so E T 112 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style 113 Change the Rhythmic Feel Groove and Dynamics 113 Oo PSR 2000 1000 Editing the Channel Data rrnnrnnnnnrrnnnvrrnnnvrnnnvr 115 Making Style File Format Settings Parameter 116 Creating Multi Pad Multi Pad Creator 118 ODED UN iain E E EEN OOA 118 Multi Pad Realtime Recording Record 119 Sed 119 SCOP TEGNING seirer aN O EEE EA 119 Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads Edit 120 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console 121 Operation siririn and in ETEEN 121 Setting the Level Balance and Voice Volume VOC sssaaa 122 Changing the Tone of the Voice Filter 123 Changing Pitch related Settings Tune 123 Adjusting the Effects rssssresvsnesensnvensnnennvanssvaneser 124 RT sr 126 Setting the Equalizer EQ PSR 2000 only 127 Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 128 Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type 006 129 Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects OVERALL SETTING 130 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone MICROPHONE SETTING 130 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ALK SENG eee 132 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function sanser SS OPEN 133 Fine Tuning the Pitch Selecting a Scale Master Tun
126. SETTING S ems fy a a 4 a OG AA AA MVO 11213 4 P bee Jet EEE EE EE IG STYLE CONTROL MAIN Q U 0 0 0 g 0 7 0 REGISTRATION MEMORY TN morener a a ages oR Bo stanton BEGET HATION MEMORY a E sli AS i oN o Sk 2O030 ag pe aee gt 65 elle ea O Ca lellejisjje z e o anen g mem With the convenient Direct Access function you can instantly call up the desired display with just a single additional button press Press the DIRECT ACCESS button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button Then simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display In the example below Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering page 139 DIRECT ACCESS ACMP oTo amp _ ao FIPLTEBBITHEJ CHORD FINGERING CHORD TUTOR FINGERED HULTI FIHGER Both Sinale Finser CHORD HAHE G and Finsered are Fossible For Sinale Finger Press the white black kesisi closest to the root esResuired ASelectivels oFtional note o rptional AOFLIional if omitted diais CHORD SETTIHG ROOT TYPE i EN G 6 D HT Er H7 11 AF AY Refer to the Direct Access Chart page 48 for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function TYPE SIHGLE FINGER HULTI FINGER FIHGERED FIHGERED OW BASS D NOTE Here s a convenient w
127. STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT SYNG STOP WINDOW setting SYNC START START STOP DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR MASTER TUNING setting DIGITAL RECORDING EUNETION MASTEN TNE STINE SCALE TUNING setting MIXING CONSOLE PSR 2000 MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings PSR 1000 DEMO UTILITY LANGUAGE selection HELP FUNCTION LCD BRIGHTNESS settings FUNCTION MIDI MIDI settings DIRECT ACCESS Exit from the Direct Access mode BALANCE CHANNEL ON OFF MIXING CONSOLE SONG PART VOLUME VOICE NEXT BACK VOICE PART MAIN LAYER MIXING CONSOLE TUNE OCTAVE settings LEFT MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 Searching the records EXIT Return to the MAIN display ENTER VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD FUNCTION STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT LEFT setting TOUCH CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment SUSTAIN MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT REVERB settings HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION HARMONY ECHO MONO TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings DSP MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT DSP settings VARIATION EFFECT TYPE selection PIANO amp HARPSI E PIANO ORGAN amp ACCORDION PERCUSSION GUITAR BASS BRASS FUNCTION VOICE SET settings WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR amp PAD SYNTH XG USER ORGAN FLUTES PSR 2000 only MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings UPPER OCTAVE lt q gt MIC PSR 2000 only VH TYPE SELECT VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters MIC SETTING MIC EFFECT TYPE selection VOCAL HARMON
128. T Pars Tuva xvas 0 Lane ER GET Press the 8A OK button To stop the operation press the 8V CANCEL button Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new folder for each category Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections Enter the name of the new folder page 45 1 Call up the page to which you wish to create a new folder and press the 7 V NEW button Press the 84 OK button page 38 To cancel the operation press the 8V CANCEL button Displaying Upper Level pages Basic Operations Organizing Your Data D NOTE The internal memory capac ity of the PSR 2000 1000 is about 580KB PSR 2000 260KB PSR 1000 Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1440KB respectively When you store data to these locations all file types of the PSR 2000 1000 Voice Style Song Registration etc are stored together D NOTE The files of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software and their edited files on the PSR 2000 1000 can be stored in the USER page but cannot be copied to another floppy disk 5 NOTE Folder directories can con tain up to four levels The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 800 PSR 2000 400 PSR 1000 but this may
129. TH SPEED DELA 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 oO AAD 100 FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range e BRIGHTNESS Volume Cutoff frequency Determines the filter EG and vibrato settings see below D NOTE In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow Filter can be used to produce electronic Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency resonance range of the filter see diagram Higher values result in a brighter sound Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency set in BRIGHTNESS above see diagram Higher values result synthesizer like effects Frequency These frequencies are pitch passed by the filter Cutoff range Volume gt E Resonance in a more pronounced effect E EG Frequency pitch The EG Envelope Generator settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds or the long release of a sustained piano tone e ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum eee level after the key is played The higher the value the slower the attack e DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level a slightly
130. TRINGS group so that you can play rich orchestral chords with your left hand ORGAN amp OPIANO amp HARPSI O E PIANO O ACCORDION O PERCUSSION I I i I O GUITAR O BASS O BRASS O WOODWIND i i i i O O STRINGS O CHOIR amp PAD O SYNTH XG i 4 Select a voice then press the EXIT button to return to the MAIN display For example select Symphon Str I 5 Call up the SPLIT POINT display page 138 From here you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices called the Split Point To do this simultaneously hold down the F or G button and press the desired key on the keyboard For more information see page 138 FUNCTION MEMU STYLE SETTIHG SPLIT POTHT FERBAB ETHGFRENE MASTER ThE Held down one of the risht three buttons and A Press a key or use the DATA ENTER dial aT C W SCALE TUNE PP HARMONY ECHO O B JJ SONG SETTING EN STYLE SETTING gt c IT SPLIT POINT O ritt MEL kL elle D EON JE CONTROLLER Ta UTILITY ET e E REGIST SEQUENCE STOP ACHP SECTION SPLIT POINT FREEZE VOICE SET LEFT F 2 ACHP F 2 Fis rsa 6 Play the voices The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice or I voices MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand The LEFT voice is played with the le
131. UTO CHORD HOTE OHLY OFF OUCH LIHIT O TYPE WOLUKE SPEED ASSIGH CHORD L STAHDARD DUET 72 HOTE STANDARD TRIO sd AUTO E FULL CHORD amp HULTI ROCK DUET HAIH COUNTRY DUET 12 LAYER The parameters are the same as for HARMONY ECHO display of FUNCTION For details see page 144 PSR 2000 1000 Organ Flutes PSR 2000 only In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category the PSR 2000 1000 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice The explanations here apply to step 3 on page 87 SOUND CREATOR IORGAN FLUTES Jazz Draw ORGAH TYPE Vintage ROTARY SF SPEED Slow 65 ELI LI Hal i Adjust the Footage E Parameters Organ Type This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated Sine or Vintage Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed C button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes see DSP Type below and the VOICE EFFECT DSP button is turned on the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT VARIATION button Vibrato On Off This G button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth H button The button sequentially selects a depth of 1 2 or 3 Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes The
132. VOICE DSP When DSP is set as an Insertion effect here PART is set to MAIN it is put here in the signal flow LAYER VOICE D D gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Rev Send gt Cho Send gt Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Dry gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt D Dry an Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Dry Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Dry LEFT VOICE Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Dry Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt Dry Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt e gs STYLE SONG each channel O PSR 2000 1000 Rev Send gt Cho Send gt DSP Send gt REVERB CHORUS DSP1 DRY LINE REVERB CHORUS DSP gt O Reverb Return gt Master EQ OUT Chorus Return When DSP is set as a System effect it is put here in the signal flow gt DSP Return gt D Reverb Return gt Chorus Return When DSP is set as a System effect it is put here in the signal flow gt DSP Return Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Setting the Equalizer EQ PSR 2000 only Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to m
133. Y MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT MIC REVERB setting EFFECT MIC DSP setting TALK MIC SETTING TALK SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT VOLUME settings VOICE settings REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE FUNCTION FREEZE 1 2 REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT Editing the RAGISTRATION MEMORY REGISTRATION SEQUENCE Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE PEDAL1 FUNCTION PEDAL1 function assignment R PEDAL2 KDE PEDAL2 function assignment WHEEL PITCH BEND MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings 123 MODULATION PSR 2000 only FUNCTION CONTROLLER MODULATION WHEEL settings 141 PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Help Messages The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR 2000 1000
134. a From here you can store the settings of all channels RHYTHM 1 RHYTHM 2 BASS etc toa single accompaniment style button to call up the Style screen from which you can select the accompaniment style EH EHYTHH CHORDS C IedeartBeat f Heartbeat FHYTHMZ FAD a HeartBeat 44 HeartBeat BASS PHRASE 1 HeartBeat a Heartbeat CHORD 1 PHRASES amp HeartBeat a HeartBeat B AR 1 pee COPY FROH FN H SECTION GHAHHEL PLAY TYPE CHAIN A J RHYTHHI SOLO HAIH E RHYTHHZ mr T O HAIH C OFF D NOTE If you change the section and channel in steps 1 and 2 the currently specified section and channel are also changed The channels being recorded are also changed and recording is stopped automatically Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels selected with the A D and F I buttons above J NOTE The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback and does not change the actual accompaniment style Determines the playback settings for each channel You can dater assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing Mutes all but the selected channel RHYTHM channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display page 111 are played back simultaneously Plays back the selected channels Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display page 110
135. a MIL Pedal I correspond to the Song channels 1 16 ma Song si mal AMDI Pedal Use this to play the PSR 2000 1000 song data with an external tone ma Clock Ext ma ADI OFF generator or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer Clock Ext MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and PSR 2000 1000 synchronizes with a external MIDI device MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion B MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment z style as well as play the chord and bass a p y v parts MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment gt P Jel E a C a 4 Call up the User display 2 Call up the Edit display then and press this button to select and set the desired MIDI Pedal 2 As Spe ke MIDI IN save the newly edited functions parameters MIDI settings For details about each of the Up to ten setups can MIDI edit displays see the be saved following pages MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received J NOTE The saved settings can be named page 41 or deleted page 43 in the User page Making Overall System Settings Local Control Clock etc System Call up the display as described in step 2 above For editing the Local Control par
136. ad bank allowing you to create a new Multi Pad from scratch Calls up the NAME display to input the new name Turn Repeat Chord Match of each pad on or off see below Start recording First select the desired voice Press the H REC button to set the Record standby mode Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE START button If Chord Match see below is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale C D E G A and B sel 2 Stop recording C chord note C R recommended note Others non recommended note Select this to engage the Record standby mode synchronized standby Select this to save the recorded pad data to USER or FLOPPY DISK drive D NOTE e Other notes besides those of the C major seventh scale can be recorded however this may result in the recorded phrase not matching the chord when being played back The rhythm part of the currently selected style is used as a rhythmic guide in place of a metronome playing back during recording However it is not recorded to the Multi Pad Press the H STOP button or the panel STYLE MULTI PAD STOP button to stop recording when you ve finished playing the phrase Turning Chord Match and Repeat On Off E Repeat Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad
137. ameters SYS EX Tx0M Rxi0N CHORD SYSEX Tx 0M Rx 0M For editing the Clock Transmit Clock Receive Transpose and Start Stop parameters For editing the Message Switch parameters Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off When Local Control is set to ON the keyboard of the PSR 2000 1000 controls its own local internal tone generator allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard If you set Local to OFF the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR 2000 1000 tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers For example this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR 2000 1000 internal voices and use the PSR 2000 1000 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and or play an external tone generator PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Clock Transmit Clock Receive Transpose Start Stop m Clock Determines whether the PSR 2000 1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the PSR 2000 1000 is being used alone If you are using the PSR 2000 1000 with an external sequencer MIDI computer or other MIDI device and you want the PSR 2000 1000 to be synchronized to the external device set this function to EXTERNAL
138. and after selecting the 1 16 tab select a record channel with the F CH button BAR BEAT GLE 001 1 0000 J NOTE Any voice effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automat ically cancelled when you call up the CHD Chord page Call up the Step Record display by pressing the G button A 001 TUT End DA The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can not be selected for Step recording You can select voices from the PRESET page however these may sound slightly different from the original voice AT GLE 0000 DATA ENTRY PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator First select the desired voice To enter the note first specify the length and loudness in this display then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard SONG CREATOR NewSong STEP RECORD 1926PPE Moves the cursor position F C_ up and down 01 4 20000 Hete F3 76 0000 0768 001 4 0560 Hote As TS DO000 076 e p Determines the velocity 002 1 0000 Hote E gd 0002 0768 loudness of the note to be 002 4 0000 Hote F 0 0000 1596 Returns the cursor to the coed dese aa entered only when recording beginning of the song the the melody For information first note of the first on velocity settings see below measure Determines the length of the note as a percentage from
139. angements on the fly 1 Press the CHANNEL ON OFF button 2 Press the 1 84 V button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off CHANNEL ON OFF HHH Q oaaoanae ono el Gl Ge Gb Ge 9 00000000 If the STYLE tab is selected press this button again o E e 1 Ve le 2 yy ernernenanennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenenee Quick Guide ED Song Playback 7 Finally take the producer s seat and try your hand at mixing These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts the song the style your singing PSR 2000 only and your playing 1 Press the BALANCE button 2 Press the 1 84 V button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust BALANCE D NOTE You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the MIXING CONSOLE button page 121 8 Press the SONG START STOP button to stop playback D NOTE O REC TOP O START STOP NEW SONG SYNC START e The FADE IN OUT but ton page 65 can be used to produce smooth fade ins and fade outs when starting and stopping the song as well as the accompaniment Quick Guide eeecsercececrrereecevrerececeererececee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee Playing Voices The PSR 2000 1000 features a stunning variety of over
140. ansmit Channel via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument If the receiving instrument s MIDI channel MIDI Receive Channel matches the Transmit Channel the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting Instrument RRRRR i cg 58 S 55 m MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive MIDI receive channel 2 2 BIT The PSR 2000 1000 s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI page 145 For example several tracks channels can be transmitted simultaneously including the style data as shown below Example Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR 2000 1000 to an external sequencer MIDI cable or serial cable External sequencer Channel 1 Track 1 Channel 2 Track 2 Channel 3 Track 3 Channel 4 Track 4 Channel 5 Track 5 Channel 6 Track 6 Channel 7 Track 7 Channel 8 Track 8 Channel 9 Track 9 Channel 10 Track 10 Channel 11 Track 11 PSR 2000 1000 track channnel MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument PSR 2000 1000 Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices As you Can see it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data page 146 The PSR 2000 1
141. anual The gate time note length can be specified as a percentage by using the DATA ENTRY dial PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Recording Melodies Step Record Note In this section we ll show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example ne EE EG Se es shown at right _ pr The operations here apply to step 6 on page 97 mn ANG CREATOR NewSong STEP RECORT 1928PP0 01 1 0000 Hote F3 80 0002 0000 01 3 0000 End The notation display on the instrument PSR 2000 may not be accu rate especially for tied notes or longer notes To have the notation 1 1 Select this note 1 3 press this to input a tie displayed accurately set the gate time to tenuto by using the H but ton and input the notes as desired 001 4 1728 BAR BEAT CLK 001 4 0960 2 1 Select this note aaa SONG CREATOR NewSong nnn 1 I 3 1 Press this button to 001 1 0000 ote 0002 0000 0019 0960 Hote display the dotted notes 001 4 50560 0002 0768 002 3 0768 BAR BEAT CLK 002 1 0000 3 2 Select this note mm SONG CREATOR NewSong ETE DEE mm 4 1 Call up the normal notes DDL 70960 Hote FT by pressing this button 001 4 0000 001 4 0560 002 1 0000 002 4 0000 002 1451536 4 2 Select this note
142. ardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped pressing the TOP button returns to point Stop the song E ND START STOP REPEAT e 240 To cancel the Repeat function press the 6 button again PSR 2000 1000 Oo Song Playback Displaying Music Notation Score PSR 2000 only With this feature you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays This can be used with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs Select the desired song page 76 78 Enables disables display of the right hand key range Channel 1 is automatically selected when TRACK1 is set to OFF from the SONG SETTING display page 137 Enables disables display of the lyrics Enables disables display of the left hand key range Depending on other settings this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out If this is the case go to the detailed setting display shown below use the 8A V buttons and set the LEFT CH parameter to any channel except AUTO Or go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function menu page 133 and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except OFF TRANS UPPER qb esse 0 alle OCTAVE 0 my D SPLIT A FOINT F z REGISTRATION BAKE INTRO ENDING e Intro Ending NewBank 127 127 SCORE 0 1Tvinkle TEHPO J 90 PAGE 1 3 ej fe fe ey EN le UU
143. atch the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room For example you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too boomy or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes The PSR 2000 possesses a high grade five band digital equalizer function With this function a final effect tone control can be added to the output of your instrument The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121 1 Call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display Select the re desired Master da EQ type a C Select the EQ type to adjust the EQ HIGH using the 1A V 8A V buttons Ck UTE 1 gt MOSES 9199 D D D EA LOH 64 64 64 SONG STYLE H PAD LEFT LAYER HATH Select the EQ type to adjust the EQ LOW using the 1A V 84 V buttons 2 MBE ARE E ET ERB BRE EEFE HASTER EA EDIT Select the desired Master 7F7 EQ type un An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to c USER 1 or 2 The PRESET and USER curves can be
144. ation memory settings Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR 2000 1000 you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument All this data is stored in separate files just as is done on a computer Here we ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the PSR 2000 1000 in files and folders Files can be opened saved named moved or deleted in their respective Open Save displays You can select these displays according to their respective file types as well Song Voice Style etc Moreover you can organize your data efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder The Open Save displays for Song Voice Style Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display the display shown when the power is turned on by pressing the appropriate A J button Open Save display for Song page 76 Open Save display for Voice page 54 Open Save display for Multi Pads page 73 118 WQICE MAIN Bi Rock Piano m Crash Kit Om ArabiePere 2 _ am Drum Kit 1 fr Latin Pere 1 Piano amp Harpsichord fm MULTI PAD handles the Multi Pad Bank files handles the Song files handles the Voice files J NOTE The following Open Save display types are also available however dere o uer O met
145. ation with an ampli fier and headphones or speaker s may be capable of pro ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs Some Yamaha products may have benches and or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures where applicable are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recommended NOTICE Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat ing to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the manufac turer s warranty and are therefore the owners responsibil ity Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to pro duce them meet these goals In keeping with both the let ter and the spirit of the law we want you to
146. ay to return to the MAIN display from any other display Simply press the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button PSR 2000 1000 O Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Direct Access Chart Operation DIRECT ACCESS button button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function TRACK1 TRACK CHANNEL selection TRACK2 TRACK2 CHANNEL selection EXTRA TRACKS FUNCTION SONG SETTING REPEAT METRONOME UTILITY METRONOME settings REC TOP START STOP REW FF POP amp ROCK SWING amp JAZZ BALLROOM MARCH amp WALTZ BALLAD FUNCTION DANCE LATIN USER TRANSPOSE 4 CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment as MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings TEMPO lt 4 MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting a FUNCTION STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT ACMP setting TAP TEMPO TAP settings FADE IN OUT a FADE IN OUT settings MULTI PAD 1 2 3 4 STOP DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR REPEAT CHORD MATCH settings STYLE CONTROL ACMP FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection BREAK VOICE settings INTRO VOLUME VOICE PANPOT settings MAIN A VOLUME settings MAIN B HARMONIC CONTENT settings MAIN C MIXING CONSOLE STYLE PART FILTER BRIGHTNESS settings MAIN D REVERB settings ENDINGrit EFFECT CHORUS settings AUTO FILL IN DSP settings OTS LINK ISYNC STOP FUNCTION
147. be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargeable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of this type of battery is approxi mately five years When replacement becomes neces sary contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement This product may also use household type batteries Some of these may be rechargeable Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged When installing batteries do not mix batteries with new or with batteries of a different type Batteries MUST be installed correctly Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture Warning Do not attempt to disassemble or incinerate any battery Keep all batteries away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area Note Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal reg ulations that relate to the disposal of products that con tain lead batteries plastics etc If your dealer is unable to assist you please contact Yamaha directly NAME PLATE LOCATION The name plate is
148. channel the data will be sent Determines the channel for changing transmit settings So est IG HULTI PAD 2 NY NO Se HULTI PDA NJ The dots corresponding to each channel 1 16 flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel s GOHTROL PROGRAH PITCH HOTE GHANGE GHANGE BERD Turns transmission of the specified data type on or off See below for details on the data types Determines the Part for the selected channel Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played Control Change CC Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data Program Change PC Program change data corresponds to voice or patch numbers Pitch Bend PB See page 140 After Touch AT With this function the PSR 2000 1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways depending on the selected voice This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique Available in RECEIVE display only page 147 O PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Receiving MIDI Data Receive This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channe
149. cidental or consequential damages Therefore these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from state to state CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities 1 Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below 2 Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to the retailer selling the product an authorized service center or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date sales receipt credit card copy etc when requesting service and or parts under warranty 3 Shipping and or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility Units shipped for service should be packed securely Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days IMPORTANT Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization A Return Authorization RA will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed 4 Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions It is your responsibility to be aware of the co
150. ck 1 page 137 You can also change the song channel itself per manently page 103 Playing with the Songs Recording The PSR 2000 1000 lets you record too quickly and easily Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance 1 3 Select a voice for recording Use the same operations as in Playing a Voice on pages 25 26 4 Press the REC and TOP buttons simultaneously to select New Song for recording O REC TOP O START STOP REW FF l ve SYNC START 5 Simultaneously hold down the REC button and press the TRACK1 button BEG EXTRA TRACK TRACK OTRACKS O 2 O 1 STYLE L R 6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard 7 When you ve finished recording press the REC button O REC To hear your newly recorded performance return the song to the beginning by using the TOP button and press the SONG START STOP button CAUTION The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power To keep your important recordings you ll need to save them to the User drive or floppy disk O REC TOP O START STOP P LE NEW SONG SYNC START ET 9 Save the recorded data as required pages 38 44 Le COD Basic Operations Organizing Your Data The PSR 2000 1000 utilizes a variety of data types including voices accompaniment styles songs multi pads and registr
151. ck how a specific tempo sounds Va ver MEG asso os N a YAMAHA BACK NEXT OHOLD OTOUCH O SUSTAIN O ECHO MONO O i cat N Se adn ad gum o MASTER VOLUI oO F MULTI PAD gt o o o C O a OAMAAAAAA NG Y NG U 2 3 le 3 nfofofoioin iie ellk I es meer mer rn HA mo om OMBO SNE ostmmstor U U U U v U U U A A ee o e a ee yo ID Tay aay aa Oo 2 me a ej o ea G5 ells ee rJe lsjle sjje z 118 rm meamem The metronome starts by pressing the METRONOME button Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO at b gt buttons see below To stop the metronome press the METRONOME button again 1 NOTE The sound volume level and the beat time signature of the metronome can all be changed page 148 This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo which not only affects the metronome but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style TAP TEMPO
152. companiment based on a wide range of chord types The PSR 2000 1000 uses the SFF internally reads optional SFF style disks and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature PSR 2000 1000 amp gt Panel Controls and Terminals STYLE CONTROL INTRO MASTER VOLUME ol 0 MULTI PAD oe MIN D fax C 20 SYNC SYNC Q iel amp atala gia alee gla a S s r Dr Se gt POWER STANDBY ON Switch m orvorvorersvrrvrrrevvrserserserverrerrrersersennn P 17 WHEEL PITCH BEND perpen nearer ee ee ee P 58 MODULATION PSR 2000 only cssecsesseeseeseesesseeseeseseeeee P 58 PHONES PHONES jack oo cece css csseseesstsetseesessesesteseseteaeees P 152 METRONOME METRONOME button msiveesvisersvrrerserrerserrerrerneversenennnn P 50 SONG EXTRA TRACKS STYLE button rrssrrrrnrvrrrrvrrrnvnrrennen P 79 TRACK 2 L DUtON ieee ce cecseessesetseeseessesesessteetesteesen P79 TRACK 1 R button eee eeeeese ess eeseseseeseessesseeseesteseeees P79 REPEAT button P 79 QD REC button ucvnvmvmvmvmvmvvvmvevvveesererrevrerrerrersennnr P 92 DI P 78 START STOP button m eeveervivevrvvvvvrevrevrevrerrerreversteversnn P 76 OG REW button P 78 Q FF button P 78 STYLE 15 STYLE Ge eee eee ee enorme een none ee eer tere P 59 TRANSPOSE O 4 DE ae P 141 TEMPO D lt 4 P DANS een P 50 TAP TEMPO button no css ess cssesee
153. crophone or Guitar MIC LINE IN jack on page 152 Adding automatic harmonies to your SINGING sc siscaceicccadcapssaaes tccgnazeenociseneccahdoavSeceienuscsgranonilaseembedawbessttedsas page 129 Settings R T EEE EE EE EN EE page 84 Haa aug eg ee se EE RE EE EE eee page 135 Making detailed settings for playing back EE easel ucecacisuaeeeeecenerae page 137 Making detailed settings for the auto aCCOMPAaNIMEN eseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeaaees page 138 Making detailed settings for the keyboard VOICES eeeeeeeeeesnneneeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeennaeaeeeees page 141 Making detailed settings for MIDI EEE EE page 145 Connecting the PSR 2000 1000 to other devices Basic iniormation on MID EE NE EE EEEE What s MIDI on page 155 Recording your performance Playing the sounds of the PSR 2000 1000 through an external audio system and recording the sounds to an external recorder AUX OUT OUTPUT jacks on page 153 Raising the volume ssec Playing the sounds of the PSR 2000 1000 through an external audio system and recording the sounds to an external recorder AUX OUT OUTPUT jacks on page 153 Connecting a computer Connecting to a Computer MIDI terminals TO HOST terminals on page 154 Quick solution Basic functions of the PSR 2000 1000 and how you can best use It cee eeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeenenteeeeeeeeees pages 12 14 Resetting the PSR 2
154. ct the actual Beat setting of the accompaniment style itself YES wo Press this to clear the record and close the display NO sete Press this to close the display without clearing the record CANCEL Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display PSR 2000 1000 Oo E J NEW RECORD Registers a new record The smallest available empty record number is used for registering When you press this button a message appears prompting you to execute abort or cancel the operation D NOTE The maximum number of records is 2500 PSR 2000 1200 PSR 1000 including internal records VED sanse Press this to register the record and close the display NO eee ee Press this to close the display without registering the record CANCEL Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display E 1VA TEMPO Determines the tempo for the selected style When changing the style with the C button the tempo is automatically changed to that of the changed style E 3VA 5VA GENRE Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned The available range includes all preset genres as well as any you ve entered yourself de eee AME CT For entering a genre name Press the button to call up the display for inputting E C JRLS Ka the genre name then edit the name as desired A maximum of 200 genre names can be stored The genre name you input becomes effe
155. cting here belongs to the MAIN part and is called the MAIN voice See page 56 for more information Me Rock Pians BP BrightPiane fn Midi Grand Me Honky Tonk Piano amp Harpsichord D NOTE 2 Select the desired voice group When you select a voice group the last selected voice will automatically be selected ORGAN amp O PIANO amp HARPSI O E PIANO O ACCORDION O PERCUSSION O BRASS O STRINGS O CHOIR amp PAD O SYNTH O ORGAN FLUTES PSR 2000 1000 Voices J NOTE Selecting a voice automati cally selects the best suited effect and other settings for that particular voice You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected page 143 J NOTE You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength page 141 D NOTE For a list of the available voices refer to the separate Data List D NOTE You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers MSB LSB Program Change num ber at the right above the voice name are displayed or not page 149 D NOTE XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 for mat and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects and to ensure com patibility of data well into the future Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice
156. ctive when the current record is edited overwritten by pressing the 8A OK button or when a new record is registered by pressing the J NEW RECORD button If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record the input genre name is deleted E 8A OK Executes all editing and changes to the record When you press this button a message appears prompting you to execute abort or cancel the operation VES sen Press this to replace the record and close the display NO er Press this to close the display without replacing the record CANCEL Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display E 8V CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display DMA To maintain the edited and registered data make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file page 151 If no saved the data will be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory programmed settings are restored page 151 amp gt PSR 2000 1000 The Multi Pads The PSR 2000 1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances Playing the Multi Pads BIT e Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo You can even play two three or four Multi Pads at t
157. d PITCH BEND Wheel amp MODULATION Wheel Use the PSR 2000 1000 PITCH BEND PITCH BEND D NOTE wheel to bend notes up roll the wheel away The maximum pitch bend range can be changed from you or down roll the wheel toward page 123 you while playing the keyboard The PITCH BEND wheel is self centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released WAVAVAY N VUVUUUVY The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard PSR 2000 Moving the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect while rotating it away from yourself increases it J NOTE In order to avoid accidentally applying modulation set the depth to its minimum setting Adjusting the Octave setting The UPPER OCTAVE button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously D NOTE transposed up or down by one octave More detailed octave related settings for each part can be made by using the Mixing Console function page 123 UPPER OCTAVE resET PSR 2000 1000 The PSR 2000 1000 features styles accompaniment patterns in a variety of different musical genres including pops jazz Latin and dance To use it all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style style matching your music will automatically
158. dard phone plugs you can use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device When these are connected with RCA pin plug LEVEL FIXED the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level regardless of the MASTER VOLUME control setting J NOTE e f you connect the PSR 2000 1000 to a monaural device use only the OUTPUT L L R jack Using the Pedal footswitch or Foot Controller FOOT PEDAL 1 2 jack By connecting a Foot Switch the FC4 or FC5 to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks you can replicate the function of some panel buttons doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment By connecting an optional Foot Controller such as the FC7 to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play page 139 J NOTE The polarity of the foot switch normal or reverse can also be changed page 139 A CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off O Connecting external MIDI devices MIDI terminals Using a standard MIDI cable connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI terminal s of the PSR 2000 1000 Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch page 18 to MIDI when you use these connectors For more information about connections see What You Can Do With MIDI on page 158 MIDI IN
159. dareutnanrape Layer Layering Two Different Voices on page 56 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands EE Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard on page 57 Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects s sseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees Applying Voice Effects on page 57 NE ENE E E Adjusting the Effects on page 124 PN page 122 Fo IWO VOICES crarraeedotceteeeesatuctenen matinee tacdsetetedausts Layer Layering Two Different Voices on page 56 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ER Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard on page 57 EMNE page 87 Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically ssrsoonnnnnnrrnrrrnnnnnnvvnrrrnnennnrrnrrnnnnnnesesernnnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnsserserennnn page 59 Calling up ideal panel settings for your MUSIC ae nebedejesssdns men page 69 Practicing Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo seeeeeeeneteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Using the Metronome on page 50 Recording Recording your eI EEE EE NE pages 93 94 SEE LE EEE ET page 96 Creating your original settings GSE ERE E E E E page 87 COME AMIE accompaniment S EEE EE EN page 108 C 0 EEE E eee page 118 od PSR 2000 1000 Application Index Using a microphone PSR 2000 only Connecting the microphone Connecting the Mi
160. differ depending on the length of the file names The maximum number of files which can be stored ina folder will be 250 Press the 8 VW UP button to call up the upper level pages For example you can call up the folder level pages from the file level pages Entering Characters and Changing Icons 1 Press the 1V NAME 6 V SAVE or 7V NEW button page 38 Change the type of character by using the 1A button If you select Japanese as the Language in the FUNCTION display page 151 the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered Mti kana kan Hiragana and kanji marks full size AF kana Katakana normal size marks full size nT kana Katakana half size marks half size KEH FOLDER ETE KO Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the 1V button This lets you change the icon at the left of the file name A B C Alphabet capital and small letters full size numbers full size marks full size ABC Alphabet capital and small letters half size numbers half size marks half size If you ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display page 151 the following types of characters are available CASE Alphabet capital letters half size numbers half size marks half size case Alphabet lowercase letters half size numbers half size marks half size PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Y
161. different settings Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate Data transfer rate of PC 1 is 31 250 bps E IBM PC AT Windows Connect the RS 232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR 2000 1000 using a serial cable D SUB 9P gt MINI DIN 8P cross cable Set the PSR 2000 1000 HOST SELECT switch to the PC 2 Data transfer rate is 38 400 bps MINI DIN D sub D sub 8 pin 25 pin 9 pin When using a D SUB 25P gt MINI DIN 8P cross cable connect using a D SUB9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable E Macintosh Connect RS 422 terminal modem or printer on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR 2000 1000 using a serial cable system peripheral cable 8 bit Set the PSR 2000 1000 HOST SELECT switch to the MAC Data transfer rate is 31 250 bps Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are using to I MHz For details refer to the owner s manual for the particular software you are using MINI DIN 8 pin Mac al L MIDI PC 1 Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Using the MIDI terminals When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR 2000 1000 with standard MIDI cables e When the computer has a MIDI interface installed connect the M
162. during electrical storms e Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul tiple connector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause overheating in the outlet e Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfigu ration or damage to the internal components Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Otherwise the instrument TV or radio may generate noise Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over Before moving the instrument remove all connected adaptor and other cables Use only the stand specified for the instrument When attaching the stand use the provided screws only Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instru ment falling over 3 7 1 2 Connections Saving data Saving and backing up your data e Current memory data see page 39 is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument Save the data to a floppy disk the User Drive see page 39 Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera tion Save important data to a floppy disk e Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo nents turn off the power for all components B
163. e EXIT button J NOTE From the MAIN display the display shown when the power is turned on you can select songs voices accom paniment styles etc alge TRANS o ME UPPER g paR FOINT Fe OCTAVE SOMG d d A J NewSong STYLE d d d 145 MULTI PAD ID 0 amp HeartBeat X Tom Flam INTRO EHDIHG REGISTRATION BAHE D e dbar2 Abar NewBank j HCE FLOPPY DISK commercially available songs your own songs etc SONG Press the BACK NEXT button to select the drive In the example display at left the PRESET page is selected at right FLOPPY DISK is selected 3 Press the A C button to select the Voice Style Function folder Quick Guide eeecercececerrereececervreceeereececee eee e eee ece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eo Song Playback 4 Press one of the A to J buttons to select the song file 5 Press the SONG START STOP button to start playback O REC TOP O START STOP Z NOTE To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song press the REW or FF button e With song data software Standard MIDI format 0 that includes lyrics you can view the lyr NEW SONG SYNC START ics on the display during playback You can also view the score PSR 2000 only See pages 80 and 83 for details 6 While the song is playing try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on letting you craft dynamic arr
164. e FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to acces sories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Fail ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori zation to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to com ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regula tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference
165. e STUDIO OPIANO amp HARPSI E PIANO OACCORDII ION O PERCUSSION Gee dii Q lt Jf gt re J lt lt t O EW SONG SYNG START A F o E O wooDwinD z 2 2 S O 0 0 ORGAN FLUTES D 1 E J BALANCE IC OA AA A A I AN fi Reuss Exit GER 089 if 1 if 1 tei ff 080 7 B SE ofoofo in 2 c Car T U U U U U U 7 REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY ONE TOUCH SETTING Bigieia 4 Lu 1 Select a style page 59 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons 1 4 As soon as you play a LED is vn The One Touch Setting is currently selected chord with your lert hand the auto ONE Toup H accompaniment starts Ee a Dof LED is off No One Touch Split point Setting data The button is not available HINT I LED is green The One Touch Setting is not selected Various settings such as voices effects etc that match the selected AOIG Rerompanmen non style can be instantly recalled When
166. e Scale Tune surnnnuvennnvvnnnvvssses 135 Tuning the Overall Pitch Master Tune 135 Selecting a Scale Scale Tune rrnnnrnnnnvrnnnnvrrnnner 135 Setting Song related Parameters Song Settings sssersrssaressansrsnevesnversvasensavensnes 137 Setting Auto Accompaniment related Parameters Style Setting Split Point and Chord Fingering ccssscssssceeeseeeeseeees 138 Setting Auto Accompaniment related Parameters Style Setting and Split Point ee 138 Setting the Fingering Method Chord Fingering 139 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard COMED ONG D vecayecnsusesiessc A 139 Making Settings for the Pedals srrrnnnvrrnnvvrnnnn 139 Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose Keyboard Panel 06 141 Setting the Registration Sequence Freeze and Voice de 142 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets Registration Sequence 142 Maintaining Panel Settings Freeze 06 142 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings OCS SC EE 143 Setting Harmony and Echo seravvonnvvsnnnevennevennneee 143 Setting the MIDI Parameters eceeeeeee 145 Making Overall System Settings Local Control bee 145 Transmitting MIDI Data Transmit 146 Receiving MIDI Data Receive eee eeeeeeeeeeee 147 Setting Root Note Channels Ro
167. e appropriate kanji The reversed area can be changed by the DATA ENTRY dial The converted area can be changed back to hiragana by the 7 V DELETE button The reversed area can be cleared at once by the 8V CANCEL button To actually enter the change press the 8 OK button or enter the next character To enter the hiragana itself without converting it press the 8 OK button Entering special character marks umlaut accent Japanese gt and Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the 6W button before actual entry of the character Entering miscellaneous characters marks You can call up the mark list by pressing the 6W button after actually entering a character by moving the cursor J NOTE In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks with the exception of kana kan and half size katakana you can call up the mark list by pressing the 6V button after selecting a character before actual entry of a character Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the 8A OK or ENTER button Entering numbers First select one of the following A B C full size alphabet ABC CASE half size capital alphabet and case half size lowercase alphabet Then press and hold down the appropriate button 2 7A and 2V 5 V for a while or pre
168. e edited voice as a User voice page 44 Save the edited voice to the USER drive Press the USER button to select the Flash ROM as a USER voice page 44 edited voice and play the keyboard PSR 2000 1000 Editing the voice SOUND CREATOR Regular Voice Parameters COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave SOUND Determines the timbre EG Envelope Generator vibrato of the voice EFFECT EQ PSR 2000 l EFFECT PSR 1000 Determines the effect depth type and equalizer settings HARMONY Determines the Harmony Echo settings The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display D NOTE Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main part s voice Common parameter Other location COMMON MONO VOICE EFFECT TOP PANEL page 58 PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 123 FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 123 FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 123 REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124 CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124 DSP ON OFF VOICE EFFECT TOP PANEL page 57 DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 124 DSP TYPE VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE VOICE EFFECT TOP PANEL page 58 124 EQ LOW GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 121 EQ HIGH GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 121 HARMONY ECHO TYPE HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 HARMONY ECHO VOLUME HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 HARMONY ECHO SPEED HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION page 143 HAR
169. e music or song title for editing Press the button to call up the display for inputting the music or song title then edit the name as desired E B KEYWORD Selects the keyword for editing Press the button to call up the display for inputting the keyword then edit it as desired You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator comma between each E C STYLE sa The STYLE FILE SELECT Selects the style name for editing Always enter the name when a new record is registered display can only be used to Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display Press the A through J button select the style name for in the display to select the desired file you want to change clear register record editing it cannot be used to call up the actual E D BEAT accompaniment style Selects the beat time signature for editing When another file is selected by pressing the C button the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file E E FAVORITE Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page page 69 m F H CLEAR Clears the entered item at left m I DELETE RECORD Clears the selected record The deleted record number becomes empty When you press this button a message appears prompting you to execute abort or cancel the operation J NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function this does not affe
170. e will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord However the octave of the new note remains the same PSR 2000 1000 Creating Multi Pad Multi Pad Creator The PSR 2000 1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases which you can use in your performances in the same way as the preset Multi Pads f EXTRA TRACK TRACK METRO LEFT a oes HE MG omm olf YAMAHA EE Se ee H 0 FF Brass OWOODWIND TAP TRANSPOSE TEMPO Ea G reset reser MASTER VOLUME stor MULTI PAD NG ogir z Ule main ax C gt STYLE CONTROL z O ACMP OBRI ommo o o o o o ii ART O START STOP AUTO ors A STANDBY OFLLINO LIN ON OEFFECT MULTI PAD naaa Select
171. ease or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound Length LENG The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay Reverb Depth For details about the digital effects see pages 57 124 Chorus Depth DSP on off DSP Depth DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice Normally this will be one of the seven available Rotary Speaker effects If any other type of effect is selected the Rotary SP Speed C button in the FOOTAGE VOL ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed Instead it will have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT VARIATION button Variation Variation Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is selected when the Voice Set function is ON page 143 Value Sets the DSP variation parameter value e g LFO Freq for a Rotary Speaker effect when the DSP variation is turned on The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands EQ High PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator With these powerful yet easy to use song creating features you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall Several diffe
172. ecsecesceceececescesenees 78 137 O PSR 2000 1000 SE NE aa EE 137 ERE 2vv44pv4vr5r4r4rr4 ee 18 58 PACH BEND RANGE here 123 Pitch settings for each scale eeeeeeeeesceceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 136 Playback of SONES dene 21 Piayine asle EE 28 59 Playing a Style s Rhythm Channels only ssec 61 Playing Along with the PSR 2000 1000 eeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 36 Playing Back Songs on Disk eeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeetnaeeeeeeees 78 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 27 Playing Fill in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment Sections incsscnsseasascpcnananacos ticennesnaceannsntenncsyn 66 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously rrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnn 56 FYING EE 28 Playing the Demos israccncace car saestaadendies wiepadataadmantacnssdaceeese 20 52 Playing the Internal SOngs ceeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 Playing the sounds of the PSR 2000 1000 through an external audio system and recording the sounds to an external recorder eeeeeeeeeseeeeneeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 153 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously rrrrrrnrnrnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrennn 26 HEN 28 0 EE E 25 ESU EE EE OEE TR 36 PORTAMENT TIME Sound Creator ccceccscecceceececcececees 88 PORTAMENTO TIME Mixing Console 123 KONE ES 9 EEE EE 16 ETNE 17 Power on 00 16 RR Neve 39 Preset MIDI Templates EE 145 PUNCI MOU EEE 101 AE EEE E ana E EE 136 P O EE EE EE 13
173. ection press the button of the selected file folder Exits from the prompt without deleting again Press the 6W ALL button to select all the files folders When several files have been selected the message in the displayed page USER FLOPPY DISK When the Are you sure you want to delete the file or 6V ALL button is pressed the 6W ALL button data folder YES YES ALL NO CANCEL appears changes to ALL OFF letting you release or cancel the YES NO Deletes the highlighted item YES or selection skips the highlighted item without deleting NO YES ALL Deletes all selected items at once CANCEL Exits from the prompt without deleting Select the desired file folder Press the 7 V OK button N PSR 2000 1000 Saving Files This operation lets you save the data such as song and voice you created in current memory page 39 to files The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives If the Open Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown first return to the MAIN display by pressing the DIRECT ACCESS button followed by the EXIT button Then press the appropriate button A J from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open Save display Finally call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page pages 38 39 Enter a name for the new file page 45 1 Press the 6V SAVE button SAE KE 1 aecz pers 6h14 IKLS HHOE EE
174. ed by decreasing the other items to be displayed parts lyrics chords etc D NOTE When accidentals sharp and flats and notes cannot be displayed on one line they are displayed in the next line from the middle of the measure D NOTE The notation functions can not be used to create song data by inputting notes For information on creating song data see page 96 Song Playback Detailed Settings for Notation D NOTE When LEFT and RIGHT are set to the same channel the notation of the right hand notes and left hand notes are displayed in piano format two connected staves SCORE Ty inkle Tyinkle Little Star TEHPO J 50 PAGE 1 3 KEY STGHATURE Dt Bbmibt T Ree F mibg Ek Cmt 3 Be Gmtbe 2 F Dmie 2 E 14V LEFT CH 2A Y RIGHT CH This determines the Left channel channel for the left hand part and Right channel channel for the right hand part This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected AUTO TE The channels for the right and left hand parts are assigned automatically setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the Function menu page 137 165 Assigns the part to the specified channel 1 16 OFF LEFT CH only No channel assignment E 3AV 44V KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song at the stopped position al
175. ed ible for both the PSR 2000 data execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER s Open Save window and the PSR 1000 Records can be replaced or added page 71 In the instructions above all Music Finder data is handled together Besides this when you save or load style files the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file s is stored or added automatically When you copy or move a style file on a floppy disk to the USER drive page 42 43 the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is automatically added to the PSR 2000 1 000 e In the example above you specified a song title but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music genre for example Latin 8 beat etc page 70 tenn eee eee cence eee e nen cent eee eencenseeecencssccsacencs Quick Guide ED Playing with the Songs Playing with the Songs Song related buttons Playing Along with the PSR 2000 1000 Reference on page 75 In this section try using the PSR 2000 1000 s song playback features to cancel or mute the right hand melody while you play the part yourself It s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform 1 4 Use the same operations as in Song Playback on pages 21 23 5 Press the TRACK 1 button to cancel the right hand melody part TRACK O 1 D NOTE To cancel the left hand part press the TRACK 2 button 6
176. eeded to create your eee own custom style structure of accompaniment styles see page 94 Realtime Recording Characteristics e Loop recording Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a loop you can also record patterns in a loop For example if you start recording with a two measure Main section the two measures are repeatedly recorded Notes that you record will play back from the next loop repetition letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded e Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data without deleting the original data In style recording the recorded data remains intact unless you specifically delete it yourself For example if you start recording with a two measure Main section the two measures are repeated As you record notes to each pass of the loop repetition those notes play back from the next loop letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts 7 8Beat 1 60 s 8 Beat Step Recording page 111 ania This method is like writing music notation on paper since it allows Rhythm 2 you to enter each note or individually and specify its length This is ideal for making precise recordings or for recording parts that are Chord 2 beg Pad difficult to play EE Sos i Chord 1 _ Phrase 2 E Assembling an Accompaniment Style page
177. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music MUSIC FINE espirisi daria 69 Searching the Ideal Setups Music Finder Search 70 Editing Records Music Finder Record Edit 71 The Multi Pads 43 Playing the Multi Pads eroovornvvvrnnevennevennnevnnnevennee 73 MM 73 Multi Pad Edit ccccscescssccsccsccscescesceseeseesees 74 Song Playback 45 Compatible Song Types rrnnvvrrnnevennevennnevennenennneee 75 SOMO de EE EEE 76 Playing the Internal SOngs rrnvrrnnnvvrnnnvvrnnnvrrnnnveee 76 Playing Back Songs on Disk rrrrnnnnrrnnnvvrnnnvrrnnnvere 78 Other Playback related Operations rnnvrrrnnvvvnnnn 78 Muting Specific Parts Track1 Track2 Extra Tracks 79 PSR 2000 1000 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range 79 Displaying Music Notation Score PSR 2000 only eornovvrnnevennevennevvenneee 80 Displaying the Lyrics eerevvrnnvvrrnneveneevennvvennevennvvnene 83 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory 84 Registering Panel Setups Registration Memory 84 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups 85 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup 86 Editing Voices Sound Creator 87 PN 87 Regular Voice Parameter ccssssessseeeesseees 88 Organ Flutes PSR 2000 only
178. efore turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to mini mum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page System Setup data listed in the Parameter e When cleaning the instrument use a soft dry cloth Do not use Chart of the separate Data List booklet is automatically paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated stored However this edited data is lost if you turn off the wiping cloths power without properly exiting from the relevant display Handling caution Backing up the floppy disk PN Ob me insimumanl e To protect against data loss through media damage we recom e Never insert or drop paper metallic or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out let Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha ser vice personnel e Do not place vinyl plastic or rubber objects on the instrument since this might discolor the panel or keyboard e Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instru ment and do not use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors e Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomf
179. ent in your performance 1 Select a style page 59 2 2 1 Turn the ACMP function on ONTROL sai O ACMP BREAK VI oie p ENDING amp D NOTE You can also use this func tion to play only rhythms page 61 2 3 Turn the SYNC START function on 2 2 Press the INTRO button To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style press the INTRO button again The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard and changes to the Main section Split point Auto Accompaniment section 4 Main sections can be shifted STYLE CONTROL aaa O ACMP BREAK INTRO a l er oe ENDING O STOP O START START STOP EBS S HE ba Press this button to add breaks PSR 2000 1000 Prud If you press the INTRO button you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is play ing Section button indications BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING but tons LED is green The section is not selected LED is red The section is cur rently selected LED is off No section data the section cannot be played You can dynamically con trol the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard page 138 If you press the SYNC START button while an accompaniment is play ing the
180. eration initializes a disk already initialized in a different format Formatting erases all data on the with a specific file system allowing the disk corresponding device in this case the PSR 2000 1000 to access it properly Since there are several types of for mats and disks available you should know which ones to use with the PSR 4 2000 1000 2DD disks are formatted to Disk Lamp a capacity of 720 KB and 2HD disks When the power is turned are formatted to a capacity of 1 44 MB on the disk lamp at the bottom left of the drive lights to indicate the drive can be used CAUTION Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk Make sure that the disk you re formatting does not contain Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up To important data start the Format operation press the H DISK FORMAT button in the DISK page above 150 PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Entering Your Name and Language Preference Owner UTILIT F C When JAPANESE is selected for the Lan e guage parameter and you change this to Press this button to one of the western languages the kanji and enter an Owner name ERE kana characters of the file name stored in the page 17 for E disk drive are changed to western charac instructions on naming ee MANE ters In the opposite case special Latin char J C acters and marks
181. es HPE 150 dr Foot Switch FC4 FC5 Keyboard Stand L 6 L 7 Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer PSR 2000 1000 1637 Numerics ET EET EEE EST 96 105 LAV BAW buttons rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnnnn 19 38 45 3BAND EQ 3 BAND EQUALIZER serrnnrrvnnnrrnnnvrnnnvevennnnne 130 A SG GE ume aes ea E A 138 ERE 00 SEERNE 19 40 NTN 6 saneMr mere e nen E rey er earer te ey rare et rre a 114 EL EE 6 Accompaniment style parts cssccccccceeeeeseeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeens 94 He DOON RE 18 60 NTN 138 ADD TO VEN 69 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices 121 Adjusting the display Contrast cccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeens 17 Adjusting the Effects rrrrrrrrnnnrrrrrrnrvrrrrnnnnnrrnnnnnseerrrrrrnnnne 124 Adjusting the Tempo arret 50 Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects sscccccccossssssenttccceceeeessesees 130 Adjusting the Volume Balance ccccccceeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeens 61 Adjusting the Volume Balance Muting Specific Channels 78 Adj sting EE EE 46 EEE ERE RENE NT 62 TN RE ipiri E E 62 AFO ELISE VS OAR D rors iaa E E 62 A L ACMP
182. es are used as the accompaniment BASS ACMP CHORD1 2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD ACMP PHRASE1 2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 EXTRA PART1 5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data Normally these parts are not used by the instrument itself When these five channels are enabled you can use the instrument as a 32 channel multi timbral tone generator Setting Root Note Channels Root The note ON OFF messages received at the channel s set to ON are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON OFF and split point settings D NOTE The MIDI IN OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal Port A of the CBX driver correspond to chan nels 1 16 Port B of the TO HOST terminal Port B of the CBX driver corresponds to channels 17 32 Selects the channels in groups of eight 1 8 9 16 17 24 and 25 32 respectively D NOTE When several channels are simultaneously set to ON the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF Sets all channels to OFF Setting Chord Channels Chord Detect The note ON O
183. ese buttons by themselves to set the split point value Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles when accompaniment is stopped Turns touch response for the accompaniment on off When this is set to ON the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard The PSR 2000 1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop page 65 simply by quickly pressing releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard This parameter lets you set the length of the key hold time This applies to the OTS Link function in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up with changes in the section This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the section The OTS LINK button must be on Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button Next Bar One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure after you press a section button Turns the Stop Accompaniment ACMP function on off When this is set to ON you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords even when the accompaniment style is not playing back About Split Point Split point A Split point L Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto i Accompaniment section ACMP and left hand sectio
184. ese items other than Keyboard Voice make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the TOP button and stop playback SONG oiiire Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console Keyboard Voice This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard played parts Main Layer Left when playing back the song Stores the keyboard played voice and the part ON OFF settings To record a voice change for the keyboard played part in the middle of a song stop the song at the desired point make the voice change and press the D EXECUTE button Lyrics language Stores the settings of the Lyrics display Score Setting Stores the settings of the Score display PSR 2000 only Mic Settings Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console PSR 2000 only D PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Editing Note Events 1 16 From this display you can edit individual note events see below Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96 Use the BACK NEXT buttons to call up the display below Use these to move the cursor up down and sel the desired event Returns to the beginnin position of the current song the first note of the first measure Use these to move the cursor left right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from
185. essing each of these buttons calls up the corresponding Open Save display from which you can select the corresponding PRESET page From this PRESET page you can save the relevant data PSR 2000 1000 Oo Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices Connect your microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack cauTION standard 1 4 phone jack Before connecting the PSR 2000 1000 to other electronic compo nents turn off the power to all the components Before turning the D NOTE power on or off to all components set all volume levels to minimum Use an unidirectional microphone for best results 0 Otherwise electrical shock or damage to the components may occur Set the MIC LINE switch located next to the MIC LINE IN jack to the MIC position MIC LINE MIC LINE When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar D NOTE You should set the MIC LINE switch to the LINE position when connecting an audio source with line level output to the MIC LINE IN jack Using the Headphones PHONES jack Use the INPUT VOLUME knob located next to the MIC LINE IN jack to set the microphone volume then trying singing into the microphone The volume should be set high enough that the SIGNAL lamp on the top panel lights steadily when 2 Connecting the Microphone you sing but not so high that the OVER lamp lights or Guitar MIC LINE IN jack page 128 PSR 2000 only p152 By connecting
186. etermines the settings when the TALK button is on The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 130 VOLUME PAN REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR This determines the volume of FC This determines the amount of the microphone sound attenuation to be applied to the overall sound excepting the microphone input allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound This sets the stereo pan position These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects of the microphone sound applied to the microphone sound DSP TYPE DEPTH VOLUHE 90 PAH RG REVERE DEPTH 12 CHORUS DEPTH O TOTAL VOLUHE ATTEHVATOR FdB B bi 2 DSP HIC 0FF TYPE EA TEL DEPTH 127 G TD c H C E n i HIG ID E T 3 C KARAOKE KARAOKE KARADKES OW EA DISCO OFF EA TEL This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound This turns the DSP effect applied to the This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied microphone sound ON or OFF to the microphone sound od PSR 2000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole These sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR 2000 1000 to your own musical needs and preference
187. etting you add female backup to your own male voice or vice versa Gs Gs moe IN OUT 1 SWITCH MIC LINE INPUT MIC L L4R DC IN 16V mo Y MT penat J VOLUME LINE IN ud AUX OUT Ho our t gt LE ED PSR 2000 1000 Oo Setting Up the PSR 2000 1000 Make sure that the PSR 2000 1000 s STANDBY ON When you have made all the necessary connections switch is at the STANDBY off position page 152 between your PSR 2000 1000 and any other devices make sure that all volume settings are turned 2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA 300 down all the way to zero Then turn on every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters senders MIDI slaves receivers then the audio equipment mixers amplifiers speakers etc This ensures smooth MIDI amp in operation and prevents speaker damage When powering down the setup first turn down the volume for each audio device then switch off each 3 Connect the PA 300 s DC plug to the PSR 2000 device in the reverse order first audio devices then 1000 s DC IN terminal on the instrument s rear MIDI panel GI SS gon E 2 00000000 o0 oo0000 O o0000000 000000 000000 o o 00000000 BE MANENE AN E MIDI master transmitting device BOOS ee LILII R LU output f
188. ewBank LYRICS Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Written by Traditional Start the song Ge Vg Gr O REPEAT o NOME 5 STYLE R O REC E START STOP REW FF Bla 2 ie 6 5 The lyrics are are JE o G display along sae with song O REC OP START STOP REW playback o al lt lt O TRACKS O 2 O REPEAT O NOME Stop the song To return to the previous page press the button EXTRA _TRACK i i METRO D NOTE The language used for lyr ics display depends on the particular lyric data If the lyrics are garbled or unreadable you can rem edy this by changing the LYRICS LANGUAGE set ting from the SONG SET TING display page 137 BITid3 If the selected song does not contain lyric data lyrics are not displayed D NOTE In this example select Lyrics in the Function folder of the PRESET SONG page z NOTE If the selected song contains chord data chord names are displayed with the lyrics D NOTE The lyrics can be changed page 107 PSR 2000 1000 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR 2000 1000 just as you want selecting specific voices styles effect settings etc and save your custom panel setup for future recall Then when you need those settings simp
189. fect sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard Organ Flutes PSR 2000 only This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds Keyboard Percussion When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group various drum percussion and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds some same named sounds in different kits are identical Refer to the separate Data List Drum key Assignment List for a listing of the sounds in each drum SFX kit PSR 2000 1000 Voices Layer Left Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously The PSR 2000 1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play MAIN LAYER and LEFT By effectively combining these three you can create richly textured multi instrument setups for your performance MAIN a _ _ Y LAYER S a SSS M Ta O ome oN uia of C D En ee En am LEFT Aa g i ffer W438 LIDE SE A ce z ls BS zg 18 o o ji g 2 a 8
190. for inputting the E C Ka ER im keyword When you enter the keyword page 45 the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator comma between each The search function finds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords m C STYLE Searches by style name Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display Press the A through J button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style This convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style E D BEAT Searches by beat or rhythmic feel E E SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location for searching You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2 selections m F H CLEAR Clears the entered item at left E 1AV TEMPO FROM You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search Press the av buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum E 2AV TEMPO TO You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search Press the Av buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum E 3AVv 5AV GENRE Selects the specific music genre for searching The available range includes all genres ANY the preset genres and
191. ft hand tom TIAA a LEFT a MAIN LAYER 7 Press the EXIT button to return to the MAIN display CL OD Playing Styles PI aying S tyles Reference on page 59 The PSR 2000 1000 has a huge variety of musical styles that you can call upon to back up your own performance They give you anything from a simple yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra Playing a style 1 Select a style group and a style HSER PEE RRB ELH pg Eurolrance M 5 Clubdance SWING amp MARCH amp H H OPOP amp ROCK JAZZ OBALLROOM WALTZ EA Ibiza 32 ClubLatin C L L mA HouseMusik amp a Garage O BALLAD O DANCE O LATIN O USER E Ee SwingHouse 5 Garage KE TechnoPolis w TechnoParty Press the BACK NEXT button to select the memory location of the style For this example PRESET is selected For this example Dance is selected For this example EuroTrance is selected 2 Turn ACMP on The specified left hand section of the keyboard becomes the Auto Accompaniment section and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style J NOTE e The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right hand sec tion of the keyboard is called the split point Refer to page 138 for instructions
192. g continues until the indicated Punch Out measure set by the 64 V buttons then stops at that Punch Out measure after which song playback continues normally About Punch In Out This feature is useful primarily for re recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight measure phrase are re recorded Original data REC START setting REC END setting 1 When measures 1 2 are not overwritten recording starts NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT 006 Start start overwrite recording l Start start overwrite recording 1 V Start start overwrite recording 1 Stop recording 2 from measure 3 y Sa a T NE button at the end of 5 measures Stop recording 2 Yy ER ee Stop overwrite recording play original data lt Start play back original data V Start playing the keys Stop recording 2 PUNCH OUT AT 006 PUNCH IN AT 003 REPLACE ALL Start play back original data V FIRST KEY ON start overwrite recording REPLACE ALL 3 4 3 I Deleted Start Start playing the keys 7 FIRST KEY ON play back original data start Olene recording Stop recording V D PUNCH OUT ES EE EE VE eee Ver FA T Start playing the atk Stop overwrite moring play back original data start overwrite recording play original data FIRST KEY ON Z y E ee ee ee Sto
193. g hord t chord type type page 62 Indicates the note that belongstoa This lets you change the root chord in the music note from the chord D NOTE The chord indication in the display applies to the Fin gered method regardless if another method is actually selected J NOTE Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic chord book that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords it is useful when you want to play certain chords Simply specify the desired chord via the 6A V 8A V buttons and the fingerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Making Settings for the Pedals sone STYLEM PAD MIG LEFT Laven MAIN PL LL vivil Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned c EZ FUHCGTIOH POLARLTY U aa ata hr mr m TU em roa e A pH p if At TD e portanento HARHOHY ECHO Determines the function to be assigned to the If necessary you can turn selected pedal Any one of the available functions the corresponding part ON can be assigned to each pedal OFF or set the control depth For information on the assignable functions see see the next page Pedal controllable Functions on the next page Pedal on off operation may differ
194. ge 106 Finally press the F EXPAND button from the SONG CREATOR CHD display in order to convert the input data into song data J NOTE To enter a fill in press the AUTO FILL IN button and press one of the MAIN A D buttons J NOTE END Mark An END mark is shown in the display indicating the end of the song data The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song When an Ending section is input the End mark automatically follows the Ending data When a section other than Ending is input the End mark is set two measures after the final section The End mark can be freely set to any position desired q PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Select the Recording Options Starting Stopping Punching In Out Rec Mode From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording To call up these settings select the REC MODE display by using the BACK NEXT button after performing operation steps 1 3 on page 96 These settings determine how recording will start REG START REC EHD Normal PunchinAt PunchutAt E en Pressing the SONG START STOP button oe a Recordings will besin Fecordina will be G FIG enables Synchro standby and overwrite from the measure my torred at the measure recording s
195. ge 42 44 e Naming files and folders page 41 creating a new folder page 44 e Copying a disk to an another disk page 150 formatting the disk page 150 Eject button Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the floppy disk Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go the disk will automatically pop out When the disk is fully ejected carefully remove it by hand If the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go the disk may not eject properly The eject button may become stuck in a half pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters If this happens do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk To remove a partially ejected disk try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors Cleaning the Disk Drive Read Write Head Clean the read write head regularly This instrument employs a precision magnetic read write head which after an extended period of use
196. ged freely However it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the selected section For example when creating an accompaniment style based on a four measure section the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen e When editing the data recorded on the Edit page you can switch between the type of data you want to edit event data or control data Press the F TRACK EVT button to switch between the Event display Note Control Change etc and the Control display System Exclusive etc Make sure to set the record channel from another display e g BASIC display page 109 beforehand PSR 2000 1000 111 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Assembling an Accompaniment Style Assembly This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements such as rhythm bass and chord patterns from existing styles and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style Select the desired channel by pressing the After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired press the J SAVE A D F I buttons and press the same button to save the assembled style dat
197. gs and in certain genres As a result the styles may not necessarily be appropriate or even harmonically correct for all songs and for all chord playing In some cases for example playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord or playing an on bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment Piano Combo Floppy Disk These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio piano bass and drums augmented in some cases with other instruments Since this is a small combo sound the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs PSR 2000 1000 Playing a Style s Rhythm Channels only D NOTE 1 Select a style page 59 The Rhythm channels are part of the styles Each style has different rhythm pat terns D NOTE You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard if Sync Start is enabled turn on the SYNC START button 2 Rhythm starts ONTROL a MAIN ME ENDING SYNC SYNC O ACMP O BREAK O INTRO O O fri O STOP O START Ol G a DEDE 6 ee Wr Set to off Play along with the rhythm playback The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO at gt or TAP TEMPO buttons I If you tap the TAP TEMPO button the tempo will adjust to the same speed that 7 you tapped Wea Press the STYLE START STOP button Eno again to stop the rhythm playback Adjusting the
198. gs may result in noise or distortion ET 64 Gd BRIGHTNESS Each press of this button switches among the various parts channels D 64 64 LEFT LAYER HATH TADRE o Ao o o e e e W HARMONIC Allows you to adjust the resonance effect see Harmonic Content on page 89 BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency page 89 Changing Pitch related Settings Tune The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121 NOTE Portamento is used to cre ate a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next Switches among the available parameters PORTAMENTO TIME PITCH BEND RANGE OCTAVE and TUNING D D Bund ks SHE AE ge ee oe elolo TETTE ag ERT ETZI aT Refer to the explanation below These increase decrease transpose the pitch in semitone units MASTER Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback SONG Transposes the pitch of the song playback KBD Transposes the pitch of the keyboard PORTAMENTO TIME When the part is set to Mono page 58 88 this determines the Portamento time The higher the value the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change Portamento is only applied when you play legato
199. hange messages refer to the separate Data List booklet MIDI Data Format Prog Program change Determines the voice program number For details on program change messages and how to set them refer to the separate Data List booklet Voice List P Bnd Pitch bend Determines the pitch bend value A T After touch Determines the after touch value J NOTE The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original PSR 2000 1000 O Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Editing Chord Events CHD From this display you can edit the chord events you ve recorded to the song Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96 Use the BACK NEXT buttons to call up the display below With the exception of the F EXPAND button the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events page 105 ATOR NewSon 4 001 1 0000 Stele carticat Press this to convert the KA ON sect N aaa recorded chord and section 001 1 0000 Chord GC Cancel G entries into song data 003 1 0000 End ED ET D os Sa J NOTE To actually enter an edited ES s GT value move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG START STOP but ton Chord Events Parameter Description Style Accompaniment Displays the accompaniment style name To enter an acc
200. he Factory programmed Settings of the PSR 2000 1 000 cccssesesenneennteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 151 EE EN EE EE EE 126 REVERE EP TET ME orients E 132 Reverb Depth Organ Flutes rrrrrrrrnnnrrrnnnnnnnvrrrrrnrrrnnnnnne 91 REVERB DEPTH Sound Creator ccccccescecscecceccececescaecs 90 RA eSak 18 78 KLAR EO EE EE ER EE 94 IE 1 EG EE 81 0 PE EE EE 147 Rotary SP Speed Organ Flutes rrrrrrrrrrrrnnrnnnrnnnnnvrrrrrrnrnnn 91 RR 117 S STOR VDO 138 MN 44 NE NE antonio 38 44 Saving EEE EEG 44 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups srrnnnnnnnnvrrrnnnvnnnnee 85 BNC ETE EE N TET 136 0 EE EE EE emer EE mere aoe 135 Score PSR 2000 only s aieresnepeaneavveicaansarroneessseaerseeoneoxecavreeees 80 Searching the Ideal Setups rrrrrrnnnnrrrnnnnnnvvrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnererennn 70 Searching the Music Finder Records rrrrrrrrrrnrrrrrrnnnvrvvrennn 34 Section button indications BREAK INTRO MAIN ENDING buttons 64 EIN 138 EE O EE eee ee 30 Select the Recording Options Starting Stopping PN 101 DES CUINS Ai Calle EE 135 NVS 54 Selecting Files and Folders c cseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 40 Selecting Intro and Ending Types ssscccccecccceceeeeeeeeeeees 66 NNN 46 PENN SN 86 FUN Me 142 FT 159 FUNN 156 UN 104 Setting Auto Accompaniment related Parameters 138 Setting Chord Channels ccceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeennnneeeeeeee
201. he Style Playback While Releasing Keys ee 65 Variation Organ SE RR EE 91 EES 0 ESN 114 VE OE EE eaei 97 114 0 EEE E A AT 14 59 E CANN EEE 115 STYLE START STOP button ccccccccccccccccccccccceccecececeeeee 18 60 VH TYPE SELECT button nusetmemneeldndjsteksiin 19 128 STYLE buttons nnnnmmeeeetrvceaua 18 59 ER TO 90 EGO E A aaieapaeriniec 108 VIBRATO DELAY Sound Creator cssbscectasancuienaeraeecgnctenaccetnes 89 Sy EN 17 159 Vibrato Depth Organ Flutes seeen 91 SE REE 109 VIBRATO DEPTH Sound CreatOr munnen 89 DE eo DE E A A 30 Vibrato On Off Organ FIUTES uasssarsssnenepane 91 Style SEIS ccniasoxirormnerenns monaehniodansrsansoinmnmnyeteantamnamaatens 138 VIBRATO SPEED Sound Credfon acssacseesscwecasvesnsorseuemnanescarteads 89 Te EE 89 90 Vibrato Speed VIB SPEED Organ Flutes eee 91 FUNN 19 57 VOCAL HARMONY button seese 19 128 SEE 55 Vocal Hammon uursesene a 15 Ve 113 VOCAL HARMONY CON TROL seisine ear 131 SYNG START button ccccccccecsecececeecccccccsccececeececeeeceeeees 18 60 Von Eve 129 SYNG STOP button cccccccccccececececcccceccccececeeceeeeeceecees 18 65 Voice Allocation Format rrvvnnnvnnurnnnvnnevnnnvnnnvnnennnnvnnevnnesener 159 SYS EX System an 00 10 IST AVL5 106 VON 15 19 54 EE EE 145 VOICE Cha racteristiCS sien sasperauspssesnevanntenineeiareosaitnsdumnroatneationes 55 System and Insertion occ cccccccccccccccccccccecccccceccccccencccceccccccecccee 126 VIE 57 Se EG EE
202. he instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter nal parts or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION e Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liq uids which might spill into any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Fire warning e Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit A burning item may fall over and cause a fire If you notice any abnormality e Ifthe AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by quali fied Yamaha service personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply AC power adaptor e When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord e Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument or
203. he same time Pressing the pad during its playback will stop play ing and begin playing from the top again 1 Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display page 38 2 Press any of the Multi Pads STOP MULTI PAD The corresponding phrase in this case for Pad 4 starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the phrase e To stop all pads press and release the STOP button e To stop specific pads simultaneously hold down the STOP button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop Chord Match 1 Turn ACMP on page 60 2 Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads Split Point D NOTE The Chord Match on off sta tus depends on the selected SAL Auto Accompaniment eran section MULTI PAD AAB In this example the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back Try playing other chords and pressing the pads Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back PSR 2000 1000 Oo Multi Pad Edit This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another Select the desired Multi Pad s Open Save display for Multi Pads page 38 MULTI PAD EDIT 3 Prem Flam I s l Tom Flam 3 Z d sel Tom Flam 2 sel Tom Flam 4 k MU
204. heel PSR 2000 only and the pitch transpose settings for the keyboard song data and entire instrument Setting the Registration Sequence Freeze and Voice Set M Registration Sequence page 142 This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets 1 8 are called up by using the BACK NEXT buttons or the pedal E Freeze page 142 This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged even when changing Registration Memory presets M Voice Set page 143 This lets you determine whether certain voice related settings such as Effects EQ Harmony etc are automatically called up or not when you select a voice Setting Harmony and Echo page 143 These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard played voices as well as the amount of effect 134 PSR 2000 1000 Making MIDI Settings E System page 145 These determine various system messages settings such as Clock Start Stop System Exclusive as well as Local Control on off E Transmit page 146 This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices i e which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel M Receive page 147 This determines how the parts of the PSR 2000 1000 respond to data from connected MIDI devices i e which parts are assigned to which MIDI Rece
205. here are Preset files folders you wish to rename copy them beforehand page 43 and use them as User files folders D NOTE A file folder name can con tain up to 50 half size letters or 25 Hiragana and kanji let ters including the Icon ID see the note below and the extension 1 Press the 1W NAME button page 38 The NAME display appears HAHE Select a file folder D NOTE The file name will appear on your computer as follows If you Change the Icon ID or the extension the icon may change or the file may not be properly recognized ABCDE S002 MID File ID 2 Select the appropriate file folder and press the 7 V OK button The currently selected file folder is highlighted To select another file folder press one of the A J buttons To cancel press the 8V CANCEL button Piano amp Harpsichord Icon ID Extension Input the new name page 45 Press the 8A OK button To cancel press the 8V CANCEL button PSR 2000 1000 Oo Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Moving Files Folders You can move files and folders as desired for organizing your data Any file folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved using the cut and paste operation described below Press the 2V CUT button page 38 The CUT display appears Select files folders ALL OK CAKTEL Select the desired file
206. hythm of the accompaniment to make your performance sound even more professional ENDING This is used for the ending of the song When the ending is finished the auto accompaniment stops automatically 1 3 Use the same operations as in Playing a style on pages 28 and 29 4 Press the INTRO button l l u O BREAK INTRO O O o O er hae Feat 5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the Intro starts For this example play a C major chord as shown below Kull Auto Accompaniment section Split Point j When the playback of the intro is finished it automatically leads into main section 6 Press any of the MAIN A to D buttons or BREAK an button as desired See the Accompaniment Structure PRENK ol o O o I on the next page or il 7 Press the AUTO FILL IN button to add a fill in if necessary Fill in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections ENDING O rit AUTO OTS O FILL IN O LINK Press the ENDING button This switches to the ending section When the ending is finished the style automatically stops PM MAIN 7 ENDING BREAK O INTRO O O O O Irit Quick Guide eeecsercececrrereecevrerececeererececee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee Playing Styles E Accompaniment Structure max four patterns MAIN VARIATION via BREAK MAIN VARIATION B 6 VARIATION lt _
207. is just one example of the recom mended panel setups You can also create your own Music Finder settings for your favorite songs and genres se TT 7 Vaa J NOTE cane m Te se Keep in mind that Music F Finder is a performance aid TRANSPOSE re O f ee ae O k in that it automatically finds AG oO 7 N pa QNETOUCH SETTING I L Oz am Aa F appropriate accompaniment styles and voices for your pa re 4 Tele oo elie ovo iE G G a G fe j 7 IE fo Pirae playing Even though you can specify song titles it does not actually contain song data Select a record For example select the top record by pressing the 1A V button to call up Show all records the recommended setups FAVORITE Show the records that have added to the Favorite page The oa data shown here is referred toasa SEARCH1 2 Show the results by SEARCH function page 70 record Sorting the
208. it or SFX Kit voices PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Setting the Registration Sequence Freeze and Voice Set The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 1 8 The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify by simply using the BACK NEXT buttons or the pedal as you play D NOTE Setting Registration Sequence Enable to ON overrides any other Pedal settings for pedals assigned to Regist Pedal and Regist Pedal here These include the pedal set tings on page 139 and in Voice Set on page 143 D NOTE When both Regist Pedal and Regist Pedal are set to OFF the pedals cannot be used to step Indicates the file name of the selected Registration Memory bank Determines which pedal is used to advance increment through the sequence REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE 7 YOICE SET Determines which REATSIRATION BANK i NewBank 2 pedal is used to MevwBank reverse decrement through the sequence REGISTRATION OH SEQUENCE ENABLE MED REGIST PEDALI HETTE OFF REGIST PEDALI PEDAL MG
209. itch settings for each scale in cents example scale of C The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument Equal Temperament Pure Major Pure Minor Pythagorean Mean Tone Werckmeister Kirnberger Arabic1 Arabic2 O PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Setting Song related Parameters Song Settings The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 NOTE Quick Start On some commercially avail able song data certain set tings related to the song such as voice selection vol ume etc are recorded to the first measure before the actual note data When Quick Start is set to ON the PSR 2000 1000 reads Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously Turns Quick Start on off See note gt a r TG all initial non note data of the ID 8 ea C_ song at the highest possible speed then automatically i slows down to the appropri a ate tempo at the first note CHAAN This allows you to start play ES Ea CHAHHEL SETTING J C_ back as quickly as possible TRE TREI sac tl AUTO LYRICS PHRASE HARK GH GH GH SET LAHGUAGE REPEAT AUTO STL IKTERHATIOHAL OH OFF JAPANESE with a minimum pause for reading of data J NOTE Cha
210. ive channels This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel E Root page 147 This determines the channel s recognized for the root notes for use with the auto accompaniment E Chord Detect page 147 This determines the channel s recognized for the chords for use with the auto accompaniment Other Settings Utility E Config 1 page 148 This page contains settings for Fade In Out Metronome Parameter Lock and the Tap sound E Config 2 page 149 From this page you can adjust the display and change the voice number indication M Disk page 150 From this page you can format disks and copy from disk to disk E Owner page 151 From this page you can set the language of the instrument and input your own name which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on E System Reset page 151 This function restores the PSR 2000 1000 to its original factory settings You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored as well as store your own original settings for future recall Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Fine Tuning the Pitch Selecting a Scale Master Tune Scale Tune The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Tuning the Overall Pitch Master Tune NOTE Hz Hertz This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrate
211. l Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice The three modes are described below VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard Main Layer and Left and or song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks CHORDAL During accompaniment playback chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the harmony During song playback chords contained in song data control the harmony Not available if the song does not contain any chord data AUTO When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL In all other cases the mode is set to VOCODER CHORD The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection OFF Chords are not detected XF Chords of XF format are detected 1 16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified song channel MIC MICROPHONE The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled MUTE When set to OFF the microphone sound is turned off VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound PSR 2000 O Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects TALK SETTING D
212. l the data will be received J NOTE The MIDI IN OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal Port A of the CBX driver correspond to chan nels 1 16 Port B of the TO HOST terminal Port B of the CBX driver corresponds to channels 17 32 Determines the channel for changing receive settings The dots corresponding to each channel 1 32 flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel s PITCH AFTER PART HOTE GHAHGE GHANGE BERD TOUGH Turns reception of the specified data type on or off See page 146 for details on the data types Determines the Part for the selected channel See below for details about the receive parts MIDI Receive Parts OFF No MIDI data is received SONG Normally the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part voice used in playing back the song data Channels 1 16 correspond to song channels 1 16 respectively MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the PSR 2000 1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard ACMP RHYTHM1 2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 ACMP BASS The received not
213. l to stop recording by releasing it if the recording punch in out function has been assigned to the pedal page 101 Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded return the song to the beginning by using the TOP button and press the SONG START STOP button Playback stops automatically at the end of the song and returns to the beginning of the song To record a new part repeat steps 2 6 above You can set previously recorded parts to play back and monitor them while you record a new part Continue in this way until you have a finished song You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR 1 16 displays page 105 Press the 6V button from the Open Save display for Song to store the recorded data page 38 44 D NOTE When selecting the MIDI part e Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI chan nels 1 16 is recorded When using an external MIDI keyboard or control ler to record this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or control ler to record this records data only over the set MIDI channel meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel D NOTE A single part with the exception of MIDI parts can not be assigned to several channels D NOTE The settings
214. lace the results in a different channel It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another Use these to select the desired edit operation Executes the Mix operation GE After the operation is completed this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Mix results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone ae These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed E If COPY is selected here the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel D NOTE All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed PSR 2000 1000 O Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments Use these to select the desired edit operation Executes the Channel Transpose operation After the operation is completed this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Channel Transpose results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be
215. lected together even those from other pages To release or cancel the selection press the button of the selected file folder again Press the 6V ALL button to select all the files folders in the displayed page PRESET USER FLOPPY DISK When the 6V ALL button is pressed the 6V ALL button changes to ALL OFF letting you release or cancel the selection Press the 7 V OK Call up the destination Press the 4V button display PASTE button To stop the operation Only the USER and FLOPPY The file folder you copied press the 8V CANCEL DISK pages can be selected is now pasted at the button as the destination destination Deleting Files Folders You can also delete files and folders as desired for organizing your data Any file folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted using the operation described below 1 Press the 5 V DELETE button page 38 The DELETE display appears DELETE Select files folders ETT ET GOES Select the appropriate file folder and press the 7V OK To cancel the operation press the 8V CANCEL button button The currently selected file folder is highlighted To select another file folder press one of the A J buttons The message Are you sure you want to delete the Several files folders can be selected together even mens file or data folder YES NO appears those from other pages To release or cancel the Deletes the highlighted item sel
216. lower level than maximum The higher ER RELEASE Time the value the slower the decay t t ia a Key on Key off e RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after 7 NOTE the key is released The higher the value the slower the release If RELEASE is set to a large value the sustain becomes long PSR 2000 1000 Editing the voice SOUND CREATOR E VIBRATO e DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect see diagram Higher 2 NOTE settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato ahaa wavernainine e SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect see diagram see a enang SPEED e DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the eve playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect see diagram Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato DEPTH onset y Time EFFECT EQ The explanations here apply to step 3 on page 87 i 4 STAGES ON po nee NED 2 mar UUU U For information on the effect gt CU F e A N A structure see page 126 for a list of dr available effect types refer to the separate Data List Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands PSR 2000 only The same as the Mixing Console on page 124 Determines the Sustain depth of each voice when the SUSTAIN button is set to on HARMONY The explanations here apply to step 3 on page 87 ASSIGH A
217. lowing you to transpose key at any point within a song For a list of the key signatures with their relative minor keys and accidentals see the chart below Key Signatures and Accidentals C Maj A min G Maj E min D Maj B min A Maj F min E Maj C min B Maj G min F Maj D min C Maj Af min sf C Maj A min G gt Maj E gt min F Maj D min The o note indicates the root note of the major key and the note indicates the root of the relative minor D NOTE Short notes and ornamented notes such as trills and grace notes which are shorter than the Note resolu tion will not be displayed in the notation E SAV QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value Make sure to select the smallest note value which is used in the song Note resolution 1 4 note 1 8 note 1 16 note 1 32 note 1 4 note triplet 1 8 note triplet 1 16 note triplet 1 32 note triplet PSR 2000 1000 Song Playback E GAV NOTE NAME When NOTE NAME is set to ON the note name and solfeggio name do re mi etc are indicated ABC o Note names are indicated as letters C D E F G A B Fixed Do Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language page 49 English
218. ly press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button I mr EE ane camel DN Va ORE OME gre Onereat NOME YAMAHA PS OHGLD Orouen Osustan CECH Omono O Ovanamon iu EYE HH HH F rv u m voce 15 osmRT SI Rew OF E OPIANO AHARPSI O_E PIANO BEGAD On D0 GS O er H 0 MULTI PAD aoe I REGISTRATION MEMORY E MEMORY iG 9 moon 2000 sj vr mennes Registering Panel Setups Registration Memory This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons Make all the settings you want with the panel controls and Registration Memory will remember them for you J NOTE Keep in mind that songs or styles on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory If you want to register a disk based song or style copy the relevant data to USER in the SONG STYLE display page 38 and register the data separately 1 Set up the panel controls as desired For a list of the settings that can be registered refer to the separate Data List Parameter Chart
219. ly pro grammed Registration Sequence store the current Registration Memory bank file page 38 44 Any Regis tration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory banks unless you ve stored it with the Reg istration Memory bank file Inserts the number of the currently These move the cursor position in the sequence selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number J i E Execute the settings by pressing the EXIT button Maintaining Panel Settings Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged even when changing Registration Memory presets For details see page 86 O PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings Voice Set When changing voices selecting a voice file the settings best matching the voice the same as those set in the Sound Creator are always and automatically called up From this page you can set the on off status for each part For example each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting however even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting if it is set to OFF in this page J NOTE Normally these should all be set to ON Use these to select the desired part J NOTE Harmony ech
220. m ADV File SG ZZE DUGU SI far XG ORCHESTRA LZ m j i VERGBEET an ETER ET dd Ge see ED ERE mm em ee ee yt J y p EP OG s SET wT ee Pr e mm r PE s emi mei Anr om sm z a p a YAMAHA SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply adapter DO NOT connect this product to any power sup ply or adapter other than one described in the manual on the name plate or specifically recommended by Yamaha WARNING Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recommended IF you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current handling capacity For longer exten sion cords consult a local electrician This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by Yamaha If a cart etc is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units This product either alone or in combin
221. mance parts 2 all but the right hand left hand Use this button to turn on off the left hand part Start the song Ww Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO at p gt buttons page 50 Ein EE To stop the song press the button again Repeat Playback of a Specific Range This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song between Point A and Point B and play it back repeatedly D NOTE You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped Set Point A by pressing the REPEAT button then use the FF button to move to the desired end location then set Point B by pressing the REPEAT button again o EXTRA TRACK TRACK Opnepear o METRO Press this button at the point you want C the repeating phrase to start Point A Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end Point B D NOTE Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected first J NOTE Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song D NOTE The specified A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number cancelling the Repeat function or select ing a different repeat mode such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play page 133 STYLE L After an automatic lead in to help guide you into the phrase the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly Reg
222. may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed page 146 e Only the rhythm channel plays Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on press the ACMP button e The accompaniment style does not start You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand even when Synchro Start is in standby range of the keyboard Make sure to play a key in the left hand accompaniment condition and a key is pressed range of the keyboard e The desired chord is not recognized or output You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord Refer to Chord by the auto accompaniment Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode page 63 You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode and not the one currently selected Check the accompaniment mode and play the keys according to the selected mode page 62 e An unexpected result or malfunction occurred If during execution of an operation you simultaneously press three or more during an operation buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure unexpected or unusual results may occur Auto accompaniment chords are recognized This is normal if the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard regardless of the split point or where chords If either of these is selected chords are recognized over the entire range of the are played on the keyboard ke
223. ment that can handle 16 channels or 32 channels when using the TO HOST terminal This is usually expressed as it can play 16 instruments at the same time Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON OFF Program Change for each of the 16 channels Message Name PSR 2000 1000 Operation Panel Setting Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity Note ON OFF value based on how hard the key is played Voice selecting control change bank select MSB LSB setting Program Change Control Change Volume panpot Mixing Console etc J NOTE The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels Using these channels 1 16 the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program MIDI operates on the same basic principle The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel MIDI Tr
224. n 6 Stop the style F M ND Turn ACMP off SYNC SYNC STOP START 0 START STOP STYLE CONTFIOL Accompaniment Style Characteristics D NOTE You can set the key range for auto accompaniment page 138 J NOTE Sync Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard J NOTE You can begin the rhythm channels tracks of the Style by pressing the START STOP button e The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the TAP TEMPO button With the style stopped tap the TAP TEMPO button three four or five times three for 3 4 time four for 2 4 or 4 4 time five for 5 4 time D NOTE When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song the accompaniment parts recorded to the song chan nels 9 16 are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style let ting you try out and use dif ferent accompaniment with the song page 77 The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open Save display Session These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes as well as special riffs with chord changes with the Main sections These have been programmed to add spice and a professional touch to your performances of certain son
225. n LEFT from the II II 1 I right hand section MAIN The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than Left hand Right hand dl Ain section section the LEFT spl it point D Split point A L bd H Right hand section L Auto Accompaniment section Left hand section O PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Setting the Fingering Method Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment To learn how to play certain chords use the convenient Chord Tutor function see note below J CHORD FIHGERIHG CHORD TUTOR FIHGERED gt HULTI FIHGER i Both Sinsle Finger CHORD HAHE C STE ESE Gere Indicates the note that Possible For Sinale Finger press the belongs to a chord Some white black kegstsd gt closest to the root e Resuired ASelectively oFtional notes can be omitted The note eOrtional amp OPtional if omitted chord name is indicated next to CHORD NAME FIHGERIHG TYPE TYPE SINGLE FINGER HULTI FINGER D FIHGERE FIHGERED OW BASS Required Can be omitted Either note can be omitted Can be omitted when the note indicated by O is omitted gt b gt O e This lets you change the Determines the fingerin
226. n you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys in gt SYNG the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance For details see page 65 teen eee cence nee e teen e ne en eee encenc eee ceacssccsaceacs Quick Guide OD Playing Styles ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings voice number etc for the currently selected style with the touch of a single button This is a wonderful way to instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PSR 2000 1000 to match the style you want to play 1 Select a style page 28 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons Not only does this instantly call up all the settings voices effects etc that match the current style see page 67 it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC START so that you can immediately start playing the style ONE TOUCH SETTING O O O 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the auto accompaniment starts 4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords Split Point ith left hand with your left han TTT Auto Accompaniment section 5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups You can also create your own One Touch Setting set
227. nature Key Determines the key as well as the major minor setting XG Prm XG parameters Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data For more information on XG parameters refer to the separate Data List booklet MIDI Data Format SYS EX System Exclusive Displays the System Exclusive data in the song This does not let you change the actual contents of the data however it lets you delete cut copy and paste the data Meta Meta event Displays the SMF meta events in the song This does not let you change the actual contents of the data however it lets you delete cut copy and paste the data 106 7 PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics For more information on lyric events see the chart below Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96 Use the BACK NEXT buttons to call up the display below The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events page 105 In the following example we ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Select the internal song Twinkle Twinkle Little Star The method for selection is the same as described on pages 76 and 83 ATOR Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Move the cursor For gare oi to
228. nce is reproduced by the sequencer playing back the song data using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds including that of a piano Looked at in another way the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano one plays the other Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument such as guitar or violin J NOTE Even though it is a single musical instrument the PSR 2000 1000 can be thought of as containing several electronic components a controller a tone generator and a sequencer Finally we ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds For example let s say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR 2000 1000 keyboard Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis the tone generator plays the stored sampled note Ned E Example Keyboard Data Voice number with what voice 01 grand piano Note
229. ne Other notes are not changed E High Key Note Limit High Key This sets the highest key upper octave limit Example When the highest key is F of the note transposition for the chord root Root changes s CM CM EM FM change Any notes calculated to be higher Notes played C3 E3 G3 C 3 F3 G 3 F3 A3 C4 Fto Ato Ci3 than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key This SSS SSS I setting is effective only when the NTR 8 parameter page 116 is set to Root Trans Note Limit This sets the note range highest and lowest Example When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 notes for voices recorded to the style channels By judicious setting of this range AE GM CM iy Notes played E3 G3 C4 F3 G 3 C 4 F3 A3 C4 you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible in other words that no o fo g Pigh Limit notes outside the natural range are sounded Se AAmir E senere rennene Low Limit e g high bass sounds or low piccolo sound The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range M RTR Retrigger Rule These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes Stop The notes stop sounding Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the not
230. nnel Refers to the MIDI channel page 157 The channels are assigned as follows Song 1 16 Accompaniment Style 9 16 J NOTE Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off When this is on you can repeatedly play back a specified phrase selection of measures of the song The method for setting a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display page 78 Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the TRACK2 button Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the TRACK1 button Determines the language of the displayed lyrics When this is set to AUTO the Determines the harmony channel for language defaults to that of the Vocoder page 132 song data When not set to AUTO the language defaults to Japanese when the internal setting page 151 is JAPANESE for all other languages this is set to INTERNATIONAL When set to ON this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels Normally this should be set to ON PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Setting Auto Accompaniment related Parameters Style Setting Split Point and Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Setting Auto Accompaniment related
231. nnn 123 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings 143 Changing the I COM eonarcccedcnassaqundeicasnnarenacannsneasaeanteacnaeienoiseetnd 46 Changing the Tone of the VOICE cccccceceeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 123 Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose 141 Gaal NE EE ET 61 78 102 115 137 Channel Messages sccccecceeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeseennnaeeeeeeees 157 Channel GE EE 61 NNN 61 78 CHANNEL ON OFF DUTON vasse essneesmustne 19 61 78 Channel Transpose sscsscccccccssssssssrscccccsssssssssnenscceeesees 104 TD 106 G 10110 EEE ve een ee eee ne 94 Chord DL cle EE te rer eer eee rere 147 61168 21a EE eee eee re eee eee EN 106 Chord TIN 15 10 EEE 62 139 CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY 90 CITE ME EE 139 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode 064 63 TWANG taeda see ep ee oy EE SE AE 126 CHORUS DEPTR MIC ee 132 Chorus Depth Organ FIUt S ssscccccccccesssssssrecceeeeeees 91 CHORUS DEPTH Sound Creator cccecceccecceccecceceeceess 90 O EEE 146 NE 88 Pr 87 Compatible Song Types rernnvrrnnnvvrnnrrrnnnerrnnrrnnnnsennnnrsnnessennnne 75 COMPRESSOR EEE r i aeie 131 CONFIE es acacnsceeenctateaorescsentascepcanecsasap eeacsnicerasnaneeeseeei acca 148 NE Fate ccs gee eo cect cece sie oes cee E 149 Connecting external MIDI devices rrrrrnnnnnrrrrrnnrrrrrrnnnnrrrennn 153 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar PSR 2000 only
232. nsumer of a product included in the cate gories listed below that the product will be free of defects in materials and or workmanship for the periods indicated This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and or workmanship Yamaha and or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date Yamaha will subject to the terms of this warranty supply these parts without charge However charges for labor and or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MER CHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and or the exclusion of in
233. ntents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name trademark and or ID numbers have been altered defaced exchanged removed or to failures and or damages that may occur as a result of 1 Neglect abuse abnormal strain modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity 2 Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product an authorized service center or an authorized service representative of Yamaha 3 This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U S A the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U S A or in any other country Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below Model Serial Sales Slip Purchased from Date Retailer YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS DO NOT MAIL FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instruc tions contained in this manual meets FCC require ments Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by th
234. number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed Timing expressed numerically and quarter note note off when was it released 120 strong Velocity about how strong Panel operations on the PSR 2000 1000 such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices are processed and stored as MIDI data The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by sending and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages The PSR 2000 1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data The PSR 2000 1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode select MIDI channels voices and effects change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts D NOTE MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data e The amount of data is much less letting you easily store MIDI songs to floppy disk e The data can be effectively and easily edited even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data MIDI messages can be divided into two groups Channel messages and System messages E Channel Messages The PSR 2000 1000 is an electronic instru
235. ny eeo O Number of Accompaniment Styles 181 169 Effect Blocks Accompaniment Style Number of Session Styles Disk Fingering 28 styles included in the accessory disk Single Finger Fingered Fingered On Bass Multi Finger Al Fingered Full Keyboard Al Full Keyboard Style Creator OTS One Touch Setting OTS link 4 Accompaniment Style 2500 max 1200 max Edit Song Format SMF Format 0 1 ESEQ Feas TC ep sm 1 S S Recording Quick Recording Multi Recording Step Recording Song Editing 6 es me Metronome Oo PSR 2000 1000 Specifications ee 000 mw 10 ELT SE K S e E ping E Equal Temperament Pure Major Pure Minor Pythagorean Mean Tone Werckmeister Kirnberger Arabic 1 2 Scale Jacks Connectors DC IN PHONES MIDI OUT IN TO HOST HOST SELECT SW FOOT PEDAL1 SWITCH FOOT PEDAL2 AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED L R OUTPUT L L R Pedal Functions VOLUME SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT GLIDE PORTAMENTO PITCHBEND MODULATION DSP VARIATION SONG START STOP STYLE START STOP etc Amplifiers Amplifiers 12W X2 12 om 4 em ome X2 Bom 5 on X2 Power Consumption 31 W Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA 300 included May not be included in your area Please check with your Yamaha dealer Dimensions W X D X H 973 X 399 X 161 mm without Music Stand 38 5 16 X 15 11 16 X 6 5 16 Weight 10 5 Kg 23 Ibs 2 oz 10 0 Kg 22 Ibs 1 oz Optional Headphon
236. o Accompaniment section of the keyboard entered to this source pattern Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Source Pattern Source Chord type of basic chord Chord changes in Auto Accompa niment section of the keyboard Pitch Conversion NTR Note Transposition Rule NTT Note Transposition Table Other Settings High Key threshold of the pitch conversion QO Note Limit soundable range the chord change Output 1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing To record a new accompaniment style from scratch call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select New Style by pressing the C button DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR O DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CON Cera 4 Record and edit the accompaniment style For details on the operations for each display refer to the explanations starting on the next page STYLE CREATOR HeariBen SAREE ji RHYTH H1 HORDS C IedeartBeat f Heartbeat FHY THM FAD a HeartBeat 44 HeartBeat BASS PHRASE 1 HeartBeat a Heartbeat CHORD 1 PHRASES amp HeartBeat a HeartBeat BAR 1 COPY FROH SECTION GHAHHEL PLAY TYPE EA RHYTHHI SOLO HAIH E RHYTHHZ O HAIH C OFF Use the BACK NEXT buttons to select the various pages Source Root root note of basic chord RTR Retrigger Rule how the pitches of 5 These are
237. o cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts These determine whether the corresponding voice related settings Voice selection Effects EQ PSR 2000 and Harmony echo assignment are automatically called up or not when you select a voice These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part Setting Harmony and Echo The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 STAKDARD DUET SPEED 8 STAHDARD TRIO FULL CHORD a e ROCK DUET decddeee COUNTRY DUET COUHTRY TRIO BLOCK 4 MAY CLOSE1 4 HAY CLOSE 4 HAY OPEH 1 5 OCTAVE VOLUHE SPEED ASSIGH CHORD STRUH 5d HOTE HULTI ASSIGH BES GT a ECHO 12 MULTI TREMOLO 16 Harn s TRILL 32 LAYER EEE Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength letting you create harmony accents in the melody The fo harmony effect is applied when you play Determines the Harmony type a 2 3 s e 7 e E e For details see page 144 u y y v y v u When this is set to ON the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Determines the level of the Harmony effect Accompaniment section of the keyboard This parameter is not available when Multi Assign Echo Tremolo or Trill is selec
238. o select the desired demo and once again to start it 2 2 Use these to select Press this to play back all Demo songs items continuously starting different display pages from the first item at the top left of the display This is available only from the FUNCTION page All of the available demos are played back in sequence starting from the one at top left The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the AUTO button however all demo songs are played back in sequence Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos otherwise available in step 3 below PSR 2000 1000 Playing the Demos J NOTE Use the BACK NEXT buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previ ous or next page D NOTE Press the SONG START STOP button to stop the Demo song To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped press the SONG START STOP button again Rewind and fast forward can also be used with the Demo songs page 78 4 For the Function demos an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing This example shows the Sound System in the FUNCTION demo Sound System The instrument also features 4 dynamic built in sound system that faithfully and authentically rerroduces all of the sound from the Fowerful lows to the crise hishs 1 Try it out and hear how apod it sounds
239. of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES Trademarks e Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e IBM PC AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation e Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disk Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care Follow the important precautions below Compatible Disk Type e 3 5 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used Inserting Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive e Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward towards the disk slot Carefully insert the disk into the slot slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out Drive lamp When the power is turned on the drive lamp at the bottom left of the drive lights to indicate the drive can be used To eject a floppy disk Before ejecting the disk be sure to confirm that data is not being written to the floppy disk If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in the following operations the messages Now executing Now copying and Now formatting appears in the display e Moving copying pasting saving or deleting data pa
240. oices in the XG category is XG compatible E DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the PSR series instruments This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software PSR 2000 1000 159 Troubleshooting e The PSR 2000 1000 does not turn on there Make sure that the PSR 2000 1000 has been plugged in properly page 16 Pee fee e A click or pop is heard when the power is This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument nee ee Masama wanasa aren sape o tomna Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR 2000 1000 may produce interference To prevent this turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from e Noise is heard from the PSR 2000 1000 s speakers the PSR 2000 1000 e The display is too bright or too dark to read The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature try adjusting the contrast page 17 e The keyboard volume is low compared to that The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback part may be set too low Raise the MAIN LAYER LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE SONG volume in the BALANCE display page 61 e The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set song playback is low compared to that of the too low Raise the part or channel level s in
241. om any manufacturer Xa XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 standard with greater voice handling capacity expressive control and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM By using the PSR 2000 1000 XG voices it is possible to record XG compatible song files Ma XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI File standard with greater functionality and open ended expandability for the future The PSR 2000 1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files The PSR 2000 1000 is compatible with SMF Formats O and 1 and records song data using SMF Format 0 ZE Vocal Harmony PSR 2000 only Vocal Harmony employs state of the art digital signal processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user Vocal Harmony can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects 2868 Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices 4 Style File Format The Style File Format SFF is Yamaha s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high quality automatic ac
242. ompaniment style call up the STYLE display and select style the desired style Tempo Determines the tempo value Chord Specifies the chord its root note chord type and on bass note Sect Section Specifies the section its name and variation OnOff Channel on off Determines whether specific channels rhythm bass etc are turned on off CH Vol Channel volume Determines the level of specific channels rhythm bass etc S Vol Style volume Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style Editing System Events SYS EX System Exclusive From this display you can edit recorded System events Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 96 Use the BACK NEXT buttons to call up the display below The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events page 105 000 1 0000 Heta FF 03 53 GF GE 67 20 4 000 1 0000 Tine ded 000 1 0000 Tenpo 120 000 1 0000 Heta FF fF 43 TB 00 58 d 3 000 1 0000 SesEx FO TE fF 09 01 Fr 000 2 0000 KoPre 00 00 TE 00 Fr 001 1 0TTT End BAR BEAT GLE 001 1 0000 pata ENTRY System Events Parameter Description ScBar Score initial measure This determines the number of the top measure The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the music notation PSR 2000 only Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data Tempo Determines the tempo value Time Time signature Determines the time sig
243. on P 40 amp LCD CONTRAST Knob eccccssessseesessecssessecssteseeseesseesetesneen P 17 VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD button oi cceceeccecsessscesecseessessesssesseeseeeseeseteeeeen P 58 TOUCH button oo eeceececsccesessesesessecseeessssesssesetseteseeseteseeseneees P 57 SUSUTAIN button ccccececcsessesssceseessessessetssesetseeeseesetesneen P 57 HARMONY ECHO button cccecesessscssessessseeseeseesseeseteeeeen P 58 MONO button oo ecceesecsecesessecssessessetesesseessssetsecssesetesesseneees P 58 DSP oL01 C0 P 57 VARIATION button escecescesesessecseeesecsetsscsseeseeeseeseeesseeeneees P 58 VOICE 9 VOICE 01V i 0 ACA P 54 UPPER OCTAVE UPPER OCTAVE button numsmesnandensmmisesnee P 58 MIC MIC buttons PSR 2000 only ceeseeeesseeesteessteeeeteeens P 128 MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER button sserrnvvrrrrrrrrnvvrrsnverrnnvrrrnverrnvnennnn P 69 ONE TOUCH SETTING MTT ed P 67 REGISTRATION MEMORY 68 FREEZE L010 5 P 86 PNG P 84 MEMORY button oo cssecsesscsesseesetesessessessesseteeteeteees P 84 FLOPPY DISK Floppy disk drive 3 5 rrerrnrvrnnvvnrnnvrrrnnvnrrnvrrrnrrrrrnvrrrnnrernnne P 7 Microphone PSR 2000 only INPUT VOLUME knob rernnreronvverorvrrrnvverrrvrrsnvversnvrrsnvernn P 152 MIC LINE IN jack ccscceseessseeeseeeesseeesseeesseeseseees P 152 Connectors TO HOST terminal sca sctheu ces cacescedsontausbacu
244. on page 2 Please read this section first Quick Guide page 20 This section explains how to use the basic functions Basic Operation page 38 This section explains how to use the basic operations including display based controls Reference page 52 This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR 2000 1000 various functions Data List Voice List MIDI Data Format etc The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR 2000 and in English This product PSR 2000 is manufactured under license of U S Patents No 5231671 No 5301259 No 5428708 and No 5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co Ltd Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without limitation all computer software styles files MIDI files WAVE data and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation
245. on that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the 1 8 buttons or the DATA ENTRY dial to change the value D NOTE For details on parameters related to the Sound Cre ator see page 88 1 UA Erom the MIXING CONSOLE display press the button rt repeatedly until the desired display is called up Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below PANEL PART MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART Includes the keyboard played parts Main ee Layer Left accompaniment parts song microphone input PSR 2000 only STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 8 Channels 1 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 16 Channels 9 16 of song playback 2 PIP AT 191919 SONG STYLE W PAD HIC LEFT LAYER HATH Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the BACK Close the Mixing NEXT buttons and set the desired parameters Console display by For information on the various parameters and settings and how pressing the EXIT to use them refer to the explanations starting on page 122 button E About the parameters VOL VOICE Volume Voice page 122 This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part channel Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature which automatically plays XG compatible songs page 159 with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the PSR 2000 1000 This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument
246. on to specify the first measure of the destination location to which the data is to be copied Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel Use the 44 V TOP and 5A V LAST buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared Remove Event This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel Use the 4A V 64 V EVENT buttons to select the desired event type to be removed PSR 2000 1000 1157 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left hand range of the keyboard For details about the relationship between the parameters refer to Style File Format on page 109 The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 109 D NOTE When NTR is set to Root Fixed and NTT is set to Bypass the Source Root and Source Chord parameters are changed to Play Root and Play Chord respectively In this case you can change chords and hear the result ing sound for all channels CHANNEL RHYTHM A 1 PLAY ROOT CHORD H H HTR ROOT FIXED HTT BYPASS See the explanations below HOTE LIHIT LOH C 2 HIGH 64 El RTA PITCH SHIFT PLAY ROOT PLAY CH
247. oops repeatedly you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys 4 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE START STOP button again D NOTE e Only Drum Kit SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel For the non rhythm chan nels BASS PHR 2 all With the REC CHANNEL display shown close the display by pressing the EXIT button voices with the exception of the Organ Fultes voice Drum Kit SFX Kit can be selected D PSR 2000 1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Other Parameters in the Basic Display I SAVE button Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data BA VII4A V Section buttons Determines the section to be recorded BA V 64V Pattern Length buttons Determines the length of the selected section s pattern in measures 1 32 The Fill In Break section is fixed at a length of one measure D Execute button Executes the Pattern Length change Recording Precautions e The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source chord When recording the Main and Fill In sections for a source chord of CM7 keep the following points in mind When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels try to use only the D NOTE You
248. ortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician mend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use Even when the power switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level When you are not using the instrument for a long time make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet 3 7 2 2 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR 2000 1 000 We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PSR 2000 1 000 We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference PSR 2000 1000 Accessories E PA 300 AC Adaptor E Floppy Disk includes accompaniment style files pages 28 and 59 and MIDI Driver page 154 WE Music Stand page 17 M Data List HM Owner s Manual May not be included in your area Please check with your Yamaha dealer About this Owner s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections Introduction Quick Guide Basic Operation and Reference Also a separate Data List is provided Introducti
249. ot 066 147 Setting Chord Channels Chord Detect 147 Other Settings Utility 00 eee eeee 148 Making Settings for Fade In Out Metronome Parameter Lock and Tap CONFIG 1 148 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication CONFIG 2 149 Copying and Formatting Disks Disk 150 Entering Your Name and Language Preference 151 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings of the PSR 2000 1000 System Reset 151 Using Your PSR 2000 1000 with Other Devices 152 Using the Headphones PHONES jack 152 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar MIC LINE IN jack PSR 2000 only 4 152 Playing the sounds of the PSR 2000 1000 through an external audio system and recording the sounds to an external recorder AUX OUT OUTPUT jacks 153 Using the Pedal footswitch or Foot Controller FOOT PEDAL 1 2 JACK sceiescanscatendavacetcinssnceen esis 153 Connecting external MIDI devices MIDI terminals ccceccecescceccsecsccesceeceeceeces 153 Connecting to a Computer MIDI terminals TO HOST terminal 048 154 GS EEE EE 155 What You Can Do With MIDI rernvornnnvvnnnvvrnnnnerre 158 Data Compatibilty sorserien seen 158 BEG 6100 ET 158 seguente 60 EN 159 Voice Allocation Format rrnnnnrnnnnvvrnnnnvnnnnevnnnvenn 159 Troubleshooting
250. our Data Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone 1 2 3 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the DATA ENTRY dial Press the appropriate button 2A 7A and 2 V 6V corresponding to the character you wish to enter Several different characters are assigned to each button and the characters change each time you press the button To actually enter the selected character move the cursor or press another letter input button If you ve entered a character by mistake move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the 7V DELETE button If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once press and hold down the 7 V DELETE button for a while When the cursor appears in reverse display highlight only the reversed area is deleted To actually enter the new name press the 8A OK button D NOTE To cancel the operation press the 8V CANCEL button The following half size marks cannot be used in naming files and folders YES Converting into Kanji Japanese language This applies only if you are using the pzz kana kan button in Japanese When the input hiragana characters are shown in reverse display highlighted press the ENTER button one or several times to convert the characters into th
251. our left Tremolo Echo and other effects are available too 1 Turn HARMONY ECHO on LEFT HARMONY DSP OHOLD OTOUCH OSUSTAINOECHO OMONO O O VARIATION 2 Turn ACMP on page 28 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right hand range of the keyboard The PSR 2000 1000 has various Harmony Echo types page 143 The Harmony Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice e Harmony Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance page 57 J NOTE For details about Harmony Echo types refer to the sep arate Data List Lc OD Playing Styles Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of sections Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats while you re playing Intros Endings Main patterns and Breaks they re all here giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional sounding arrangements INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song When the intro finishes playing accompaniment shifts to the main section MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures and repeats indefinitely until another section s button is pressed BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the r
252. owing the fade out range of 0 5 0 seconds Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out or go from maximum to minimum range of 0 20 0 seconds Determines the time signature of the metronome sound When you start the song or accompaniment style the values matching to them are automatically set Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Parameter Lock This function is used to lock the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls in other words instead of via Registration Memory One Touch Setting Music Finder or song and sequence data 3 PARAHETER LOCK El TAP PERCUSSION Hi HatClosed VELOCITY 30 SELEC MIREVERE RETURH LEVEL O CHORUS RETURH LEVEL CIOSP RETURH LEVEL C SPLIT POIHT PSR 2000 only Determines whether the selected parameter is locked checkmarked or unlocked empty Selects the desired parameter for locking unlocking Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound used for the Tap Start function page 51 Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit page 55 can be selected Determines the level of the tap sound Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication CONFIG 2 UTILIT DEE COMFIG 2 FESR f BAREN EAS TEH EEE EBRE Eti if td Ei LCD BRIG
253. p recording 2 Vv 8 4 5 Deleted Start overwrite recording PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT Start play back original data V Stop recording 2 Yy TE al EE Se ae Start overwrite recording PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT AT 006 Start play back original data V M Previously recorded data Newly recorded data C Deleted data Stop overwrite recording play original data Vv a KE es ee ee Start overwrite recording PSR 2000 1000 q Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Editing a Recorded Song Whether you ve recorded a song using Quick Recording Multi Recording or Step Recording you can use the editing features to change the song data Editing Channel related Parameters Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 96 To call up the display shown below use the BACK NEXT buttons Quantize Quantize lets you clean up or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel For example the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter note and eighth note values _ EE G C e Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value see below Calls up the S
254. playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD STOP button HM Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON the phrase will be automatically re harmonized to match the accompaniment chords PSR 2000 1000 D Creating Multi Pad Multi Pad Creator Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads Edit With this method you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually without having to perform them in real time The operations here apply to step 4 on page 118 01 1 0000 01 1 0140 bad 002 1 0000 Hote Hote End 64 0000 0020 110 0000 0040 01 1 0000 Hote 01 1 0140 Hote fad l002 1 0000 End BAR BEAT GLE 001 1 ooo 80 64 0000 002 110 0000 004 The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs page 96 with the exception of the points described below You can also edit each event from the Edit page and the editing process the same as in editing songs page 105 e Just as with Song Recording the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad This would be convenient for example in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad set to Repeat On with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback e Since
255. playing Upper Level pages sssccceeceeeeeeeeettnteeeeeeees 44 PO REE AE ee 159 Dn EAE E E E E ences 55 PP I 19 57 126 DSP Depth Ore ann uLuvassmesesem erd 91 DSP DEPTH Sound Creator sevesnsccussdcecceicnentasenddecsdccdiecaeeeades 90 DSP on off Organ Flutes sanacesusancersensarsentanszacedaaaneienonenanteoacs 91 DSP Type Organ Flutes ee cess eeeeeseeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 E E AEE E EE T EEA PA N ET 114 E AG 0 EEE E E RE EN 58 143 EEE EE EE 111 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style rrrrrrnnrrrrnrnrvvvrrrn 113 Editing a Recorded SOME trocscsesarevranavegnancivacsrerastonenersetoncscess 102 Editing Channel related Parameters scccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 Editing Chord Eventi EEE 106 Editing Note Events server 105 ENE Records vavvueagss asked 71 Editing System Be 106 Editing the Channel Data rssrnnnnnnrrnnnnvvvvvrrnnnnrrrnnnnnserrrnnn 115 NIE 87 Ege REE 19 128 BEG OG EE EE 125 Effect Connections assnnnnnnnsavsnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnsvesssssnnnnnnsssssssssnne 126 2 SLO GE 126 ECTE enn EE 90 EFFEC TEO Ore an FIGS TE 91 E OE EE serene cies 124 EEE EE E 89 EG ATTACK Sound Creator c cccecceccececcecesceccecesceseecusees 89 EG DECAY Sound Grease 89 EG RELES Sound Creator cccccecceccececceccececcecesceseecusens 89 Embellish and enhance your melodies with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects 29 Nr 100 NE 66 ENDING rit DURON se iecdzsa
256. playing the next note before releasing the previous one PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part The range is from 0 to 12 with each step corresponding to one semitone OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves over two octaves up or down The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the UPPER OCTAVE button TUNING Determines the pitch of the instrument PSR 2000 1000 O Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Adjusting the Effects The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121 NOTE There are three effect sec tions Reverb Chorus and DSP which contains a vari ety of effect types For details refer to the Effect Block list page 125 1 Indicates the type name for each effect block sige Press this to edit and store per me the effect page 124 125 BBE ZAFEBE ETE BEBE Hi SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL Each press of this button switches among the various parts channels AUAHA Switches among the effect sections REVERB CHORUS J y and DSP Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part For more information about the characteristics of each effect see the Effect Block list on page 125 BLOCK DSPILAVER CATEGORY REVERE TYPE HALL3 DISTORTION HAH When the BL
257. ps 2 and 3 D NOTE To pause press the SONG START STOP button To resume recording press the SONG START STOP but ton again D NOTE You can also use the metro nome click as a guide while recording The sound of the metronome is not recorded CAUTION Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance If you wish to save the recording make sure to store it to internal mem ory USER drive or floppy disk page 38 44 PSR 2000 1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs Song Creator Multi Recording This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels and create the sound of a full band or orchestra The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below Channels en Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN Voice MAIN default settings Available parts Voice MAIN LAYER LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE 1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm This is the basis for the accompaniment containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns Usuall
258. r 5 4 time tap five times PSR 2000 1000 Playing the Demos The PSR 2000 1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and rhythms plus a wealth of advanced functions Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR 2000 1000 a NCTION Pressing the DEMO button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random Use the BACK NEXT buttons to select the desired Demo category Function Demos These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR 2000 1000 Voice Demos These showcase the voices of the PSR 2000 1000 Style Demos These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR 2000 1000 DEMO METTE fS TYEE ren Lyrics Display da Voices aie Score Function 4 Style ea Vocal Harmony T Music Finder ah Style Creator FUNCTION Overall Pi 2 3 Press one of these buttons twice once t
259. rd as indicated and set up a layer of two different voices on the right Applying Voice Effects This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard LEFT OHOLD f 1 ama gee rane uge u EEE og oF IN M OTRACKSO 2 O1 OREPEAT O NOME YAMAHA BACK NEXT OHOLD OTOUCH OSUSTAIN OECHO OMONO O VARIATION y amp H HH PH STYLE 0 R VOICE Y FF OPIANO amp HARPSI O_E PIANO o av TRANSPOSE TEMPO Lota SS eo reset reser MASTER VOLUME I 2 oe C ICICI 6 m fis Key A PE 98 Seay MULTI PAD NG Os sJ 2 sjle STYLE COI he ont No eran W A s e o a alls gt o lo N 1 STANDBY 20N Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on Press it again to turn the effect off For explanations on each of the effects see below E TOUCH
260. rent recording methods are available Quick Recording page 93 which lets you record easily and quickly Multi Recording page 94 which lets you record several different parts and Step Recording page 96 which lets you enter notes one by one Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance Main Layer Left but also the effects vocal harmony and auto accompaniment parts The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk page 38 44 f 1 TG md WEE om la ar S ER e Jer gt rs mer Reset reset I MULTI PAD N A 1 2 3 4 DIGITAL RECORDING EXTRA TRACK _TRACK METRO O TRACKS O 2 O 1 O REPEAT O NOME STYLE L R O REC TOP O START STOP REW NEW SONG SYNC START A About Song Recording M Quick Recording page 93 This is the easiest recording method and lets you quickly record the piano z NOTE e The internal memory capacity of song you are practicing You can select from four parts right hand left hand the PSR 2000 1000 is about and auto accompaniment multi pad For example you can record only your 580KB PSR 2000 260KB PSR er f l It ane oht 1000 Memory capacity for 2DD right hand pe
261. ressed DELETE will appear over channels containing data To delete data from a specific channel simultaneously hold down this button and press Calls up the display for changing the the appropriate 1 8A button To release or cancel the tempo or beat time signature Selects an empty style allowing you to create a c new style from scratch Available only when the channel is set to RHY1 or RHY2 this lets you delete specific percussion sounds during selection press the 1V 8V button corresponding to the channel you wish to cancel As long as you continue to hold down the J button you can toggle between deleting and restoring the selected data Releasing the J button permanently deletes the data Before recording to one of the non rhythm channels BASS PHR 2 make sure to delete the existing data of the recording Simultaneously hold down this appropriate channel button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete REC Channel is enabled for recording Channel is enabled for playback OFF Channel is muted D NOTE If you ve enabled Sync Start by pressing the SYNC START button you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the key board 2 First select the desired voice Start recording by pressing the STYLE START STOP button The selected section of the style starts playing back Since the rhythm pattern l
262. rformance or you can simultaneously record both your rig and 2HD floppy disks is about hand and the auto accompaniment 720KB and 1 44MB respectively When you store data to these loca Multi Recording page 94 tions all file types of the PSR 2000 This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds and create eg the sound of a full band or orchestra Record the performance of each The microphone input signal PSR instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions You can 2000 only cannot be recorded also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with FL testede ed 1000 are automatically recorded as your own performance SMF Standard MIDI File format 0 data For details on SMF see E Step Recording page 96 page 159 This method is like writing music notation on paper It lets you enter each note Playback of the recorded song data EE es ah Sad ih This isidealt ki f can be transmitted from MIDI OUT individually by specifying the pitch and length This is ideal for making precise eine veuplarinesoundsel recordings or for recording parts that are difficult to play connected external tone generator _ page 146 E Song Editing page 102 The volume level of each channel The PSR 2000 1000 also lets you edit the songs you ve recorded by the Quick ee the Mixing Console and the set Recording Multi Recording and Step Recording methods tings can be saved Moreover even after you ve
263. rns the Song Auto Open function on or off When this is set to ON the PSR 2000 1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below first copy the data of the original source disk to the PSR 2000 1000 then copy the data to the backup destination disk 2 Insert the disk containing the a i original data into the drive and mm ress OK Source Destination P disk disk 1 Press the F button A message appears prompting you to insert the source disk A Now copying message appears and the PSR 2000 2 NOTE Commercially available At the Please insert a destination disk and press the OK button prompt eject the source disk and replace it with a blank formatted disk then press OK To abort the operation press CANCEL 1000 begins copying data to internal memory To abort the operation press CANCEL When the operation is finished or when prompted eject the destination disk music data is subject to protection by copyright laws Copying commer cially available data is strictly prohibited except for your own per sonal use Some music software is purposely copy protected and cannot be copied Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the first time make sure to properly NOTE format it on the PSR 2000 1000 This includes blank disks as well as disks The Format op
264. s f l ET PN N om o 2 04 OREPEAT ONOME DYAM AHA r ine OHOLD OTOUCH OSUSTAN OECHO OMONO O F OVARIATION EE LH H HH pl ea 0 W REC Top_OSTARTSTOP Ri F aL VoicE p s OPIANO amp HARPSI O_E PIANO OAC o ION J C ICICI 200 fis XG G FE 96 Em MASTER TUNE FUNCTION GALE TUNE AP HARMONY ECHO JJ SONG SETTING STYLE SETTING FY SPLIT POINT HRD x L kL wilh CONTROLLER Ta UTILITY EP REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZES VOICE SET Set the parameters of the selected function The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations Wa To return to the previous display press the at EXIT button Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning Master Tune and Scale Tune E Master Tune page 135 This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument letting you accurately match the tuning with
265. s 147 Setting Harmony and EchO eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 Setting Root Note Channels c esesseeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard EEE dunoneretionnoresay 57 Setting Song related Parameters ssseseecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 Setting the Fingering Method ceeeeeececeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeees 139 Setting the Level Balance and Voice rrrrnnnnnnnrrrrrrsrrrrrnnnn 122 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects 132 Setting the MUNPN 145 Setting the Registration Sequence Freeze and Voice Set 142 Setting the volume ccccccccccessssssnsntccceessesensssseneceeesees 17 le OEE A eee N E O T 55 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style 77 NOEN vr 62 SMF Standard MIDI File cc cccecceccececcecescescecsceceececes 159 PSR 2000 1000 167 51510 EEE EE 14 75 TOUCH UGG A seneni soceascies eons ar unisawwaveuen diewenteualndsavebannienees 19 57 SONG START STOP button srrvrnnvrnnvvnnernnevnnevenevener 18 76 TRACK 1 R DON es 18 79 SONG AUTO REVOICE scscccchonsyicnsssntentescndysapedesnsaoewsetoensant i TRACK 2 L DON armen dmnadrsinne 18 79 SONG CHAIN PLAY cncarescncvesesanencsltwanciudsntieasacthnasdantehwtacwanes 137 HE EEE REE 146 910101 200 O 55 11 0 EE EO N AIEE A T Suances 92 es CLOG OE RE 146 Song FAN Ci EE nem eccieeas 21
266. s in a second D NOTE The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices Use this function to tune this instrument to other instruments 440Hz is the most commonly used frequency HASTER TURE ddt 0Hz Determines the overall pitch of the PSR 2000 1000 from 414 8 466 8 Hz Press the 4 or 5 AV buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440 0 Hz Selecting a Scale Scale Tune J NOTE The current tuning is shown above or below the corresponding key Cent A unit of pitch equal to 1 100 of a semitone 100 cents 1 semitone J NOTE You can register your origi nal scale tunings to a REG ISTRATION MEMORY button To do this check mark SCALE in the REG ISTRATION MEMORY display page 84 Determines the base note for each scale When the base note is changed the pitch of the keyboard is transposed yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes Be eal Page 109 Determines the fine tuning of the selected note in 1 cent steps Press the 5 or 6 A V buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning The tuning range is from 64 through 0 to 63 Each increment equals one cent one cent is one hundredth of a semitone
267. s or cuts all velocity values in the selected section channel Values above 100 boost the overall velocity while values below 100 reduce it Expand Compress D PSR 2000 1000 Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters see the list D NOTE Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard The more strongly you play the keyboard the higher the velocity value and hence the louder the sound Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Editing the Channel Data In this display there are five different channel related edit functions including Quantize for editing the recorded accompaniment style data The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109 See the explanations below D NOTE Preset channel BASS PHRASE 2 can not be edited GHAHHEL Quantize Refer to page 102 Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel selected with the 1A V 2A V CHANNEL buttons according to the specified percentage selected with the 4A V 5 A V BOOST CUT buttons Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel Use the 44 V TOP and 5A V LAST buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied Use the 64 V DEST butt
268. s that cannot be read by the instrument Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to access files originating or edited by a computer having a different language operating BAGE NEXT system In general be careful when switching languages you risk not being able to access the data properly 2 1 Select the desired 2 2 Call up the Help topic topic Select the Language if necessary The language selected here are also used for various Messages shown during operations When two or more pages available Call ur the ae MEHL eee use this to select different pages by Pressing Select the arrerorriate Function disFlas by Fressina CA CI VY ND Call uF the afFfrorrlatk Fase by using CBACKI CHESTI Select the desired Farlameter with CA or CBI then make the settinsfby usina 14 F a F Press this to return to the previous display EXIT Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic Simply select the underlined word using the DATA ENTRY dial and press the ENTER button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic PSR 2000 1000 O Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice or letting you hear and che
269. sarecanvanuscansatanaeivies P 154 HOST SELECT switch oo cececcesesseesssesesesseseeseesesseeseteeees P 154 MIDI OUT IN terminals rerrnrrrrorrrrrnrrrrorrrrsnvrersrversnrenrnn P 153 FOOT PEDAL 1 SWITCH jack rirrrrrtrrrrrvrrvrvrrvrrsersnenn P 153 FOOT PEDAL 2 jack srorrrrvrrrrvrrv rv errrevrvrvserseeserseennn P 153 AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED L R jacks oororvorrrvrerrvrersnenn P 153 OUTPUT L L R R jacks cecccccssessecseesesssessesseeseseesees P 153 DCINterminal mmmmrrnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrnrrrrnrerrrnerrnnrrnnernnennn P 153 PSR 2000 1000 O Quick Guide 1 2 ccc ww ww ww ee eee Playing the Demos Reference Demo button on The PSR 2000 1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs that showcase its rich authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles What s more there s a special selection of Demo functions These take you through a hands on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PSR 2000 1000 in your own music 1 Press the DEMO button 2 Press the BACK NEXT button to select the Demo automatically plays a categories back the Demo DENG songs at random FUNCTION O For this example FUNCTION is selected Function Demos demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR 2000 1000 PS Overall A E Lyrics Display
270. seeseeesecesvesevevees 18 17 i aa Other Playback related Operations rrrrrrnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrennnnn 78 MT en 136 NTN 148 Measure Beat Clock sisssirasoasseensuneaduanestnecseaienentaasnsaennenceesanasser 97 MEMORY butt 19 84 TND 138 V NT EEE 18 68 EN Me i OUTPUT L L R R jacks oeann 19 153 EEE E EE A OVERALL SETTING LE 130 MT 148 Fe 108 METRONOME button sssini 18 50 Owner Pea ee enna ie GE EE NE EE NE BR TR MIC buttons PSR 2000 ONY Luvsesammmssrneeede 19 128 P MIC LINE IN BE serenade 19 152 MICROPHONE SET TINO ee 130 PN 94 MIC SETTING button ccccceccccsecccsccccsccceecceccceecs 19 128 FN a ie aarneterse tines E antec enmeneenbaae smi T 132 Me 145 PANEL SUSTAIN Sound Creatol scscsssssineaspsassnsaenebeatiiienscevters 90 MIDI OUT IN terminals c ccceccceccecceceeccaecees 19 153 FAC 5 ER EEE NER KERR 116 MT 157 Parameter HOCK nanssneesnesnesedmeden neii 149 INN 153 Bath ee 2243 SKO er E E 153 50 EEE E aseeunriaqeoae 139 MIDI Receive PariS ee 147 PEDAL TZ POLARITY RE 139 KAL IS ETU 2 oe ccurecscnaccioyc acute AE 151 PEDAL PUNCH INOU T anses e dede 101 MN 153 154 Pedal controllable Functuonsuussuarmansnepesasnp av 140 ET EE 103 PHONES jack ernrrrrrrerererrrvrrerererrrrerarerersrsssaveversssssern 18 152 MIXING CONSOLE button 18 121 NNN 94 Mode Organ FIUteS cccccccccsscesssceseceesseeseceseeceseeseseeeseeenses 91 Phrase Mark cccccceccececceccececcsceccecsec
271. setsetsetseesesesesneseee P 51 O PSR 2000 1000 vin Ze BX igs Fa i me 49 E ES amp gt ETF eg amp Eng E Ee EJ Ee EJ hug ea B ay MASTER VOLUME MASTER VOLUME dial orrrrnonrvnrorrrnrnrrnrrrrrnrnrnnrrrrenrnnnnennn P17 FADE IN OUT button 0 eecesceeeseeseessessetsstesetsetesenseteseseees P 65 MULTI PAD 2 EE buttons EE P 73 STOP button oo eececceccsccseesseesecssessessetssesseteetesseatesenseneseeseees P 73 STYLE CONTROL ACMP button cvevvvvvvmvvvvvervvvvvvvvvevereseeseesne P 60 BREAK button muvvevvevvrvvvevvvevsevvevvervvervvverserssersreeseenns P 64 INTRO button veven P 31 66 MAIN A DuUttON ec ecececceseessesseesseesecseessessetestesetseresenseteseeseees P 64 MAIN B 01 Col en P 64 MAIN C button oo eeeceseeseessesseesecescsesssessetesesetserssnseteseeseess P 64 MAIN D button on ececeseesesseeseesseesecsetssesetessesetsetesenseveseeseees P64 ENDING rit button eee cess eesessesstess tennessee P 31 66 AUTO FILL IN button soersnrorrnvvrrsvrrrnvvrrrnrerrnnversnverrnvnernnn P 66 OTS LINK button evrvvrvvvvvvevvvvvvvvvvvvvevvvvne P 68 amp SYNC STOP button imuvacvvevvververvrerrerrserrserrrersersserssersennn P 65 SYNC START button mvmrvsrevervvvvvvrvrvvsvevrerrerverrsersrerseenne P 60 START STOP button oo cecesseccsessecssesseeseesetseeeseesetesteseee P 60 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREAT
272. several parts are being played simultaneously In addition to reverb and chorus effects this section features a variety of special effects including distortion Any unused DSP blocks are automatically 1 assigned to the remaining active parts PSR 2000 1000 O Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Effect Structure The PSR 2000 1000 features the following digital effect systems The effect type depth and various parameters can be set with the panel controls About the Effect Connections System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways System or Insertion System applies the selected effect to all parts while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part Reverb and Chorus are System effects and DSP 2 DSP 4 PSR 2000 only are Insertion effects The DSP1 DSP effect on the other hand can be configured for either System or Insertion routing The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send return controls set on the PSR 2000 1000 PSR 2000 assigned to the active parts MAIN VOICE Unused DSP blocks are automatically DRY LINE LAYER VOICE LEFT VOICE MIC SONG each channel STYLE each channel DSP1 When DSP is set as an Insertion effect here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels it is put here in the signal flow PSR 1000 MAIN
273. sing the ENTER button In the example VOICE display you can select the desired voice file with the DATA ENTRY dial and call up the selected item by pressing the ENTER button on the panel O PSR 2000 1000 TRAHS LIPFFER SPLIT age r 0 AE OCTAVE 0 mH FOIHT A SOMG d d d 126 Ji NewSong BAF Lyrics gery STYLE MULTI PAD HeartBeat Ht Tom Flam INTRO EHDING FEGISTRATIOH BANK 4bar Abar NewBank k HGE a BrightPians Ma Honky Tonk or SO fm Midi Grand Grand Piano Me Oct Piano 1 a GrandHarpsi fm Oct Piano 2 ENTER PP Harpsichord Ma Rock Piano fin Piano amp Harpsichord j Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Direct Access Instant Selection of Displays DIRECT ACCESS a y I VOICE EFFECT NE N HSD OTOUCH OSUSTAN O ESHO omono PSP Ovarianon _ YAMAHA CH LILA EON ok cers oA orao 5 G e e E w IGS O CHOIR amp PAD NTI o x USER O ORGAN FLUTES HER GENE Musie FET ES LRESET US 0 uk 0 EN D om O O MULTI PAD PRESL BALANCE I es ONE TOUCH
274. sounds for your song playback e FILTER page 123 These controls affect the tone quality of the voice letting you add power punch or brightness to the sound e TUNE page 123 These give you various tuning controls e EFFECT page 124 These control the amount of effect applied to the sound e EQ Equalizer PSR 2000 only page 127 Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument letting you adjust the sound to match the particular performance space Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part PSR 2000 1000 O Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices Mixing Console Setting the Level Balance and Voice Volume Voice The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 121 1 Use these to select the VOICE Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of PANPOT or VOLUME the XG voices in XG song data with the special parameter rows voices of the PSR 2000 1000 To use the normal XG voice set turn this off DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR gt RECORDING DIGITAL Each press of this button switches Alonsu os sed among the various SONG STYLE W PAD WIC LEFT LAYER HAIN eel ean to parts channels e replaced These let you select the voice of each part and adjust the panpot and volume VOICE Calls up the VOICE display from which you can select the desired voice page 5
275. ss it repeatedly until the desired number is selected PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the file name Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the 1V ICON button from the character input display page 45 Select the desired icon by using the A J buttons or by using the 34 V BA V buttons then enter the selected icon by pressing the 8A OK button HB Turns pages for icon selection Sqg Scceocs s s bp Jo Jo JJ as fe elatas fo fo Enters the selected icon Cancels the icon selection operation This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values The actual function of the DATA ENTRY dial differs depending on the selected display M Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the DATA ENTRY dial In the example BALANCE display turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display highlight To adjust the volume of another part first select the part by pressing the LA V button corresponding to the part then rotate the DATA ENTRY dial E Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the DATA ENTRY dial The selected item can then be called up or executed by u
276. ss this button while the style is playing The time of the fade in fade out can also be set page 148 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys SYNC STOP When the Synchro Stop function is engaged accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment section is played 1 Turn ACMP Accompaniment on 2 Turn SYNC STOP on SYNC START is also automatically set to on when SYNC STOP is turned on STYLE CONTROL r MAIN ENDING SYNC SYNC ACMP BREAK INTRO O O fri STOP START O START STOP O a be ODEDC 6 8 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the auto accompaniment starts Split point Auto Accompaniment section 4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys 5 Playing a chord with your left Press the SYNC STOP hand automatically restarts the SYNC START button auto accompaniment again to stop the accompaniment J NOTE e Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE START STOP button e You can select the Intro and Ending type by press ing the E button in the MAIN window page 66 e f you press the INTRO button while the ending is playing the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished
277. ssesssecssssssessssessee 50 FT 51 Reference Playing the Demog 52 VOICES cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccs D4 Selecting a VOICE mssresrsrasersnvsssnsessranensanennennnsnanesn nes 54 Layer Left Playing Several Sounds SIMUILANCOUS o cccicnsscecsssacasscestsdeasdencraveesecnonccneent 56 Layer Layering Two Different Voices 56 Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard 57 Applying Voice Effects rrrrornnvrrrnnvrnnevrnnnevnnnevesnnee 57 PITCH BEND Wheel amp MODULATION Wheel 58 Adjusting the Octave setting errvvrnnevrnnvevrnnevernee 58 NS E SO Playing SU NO asp opeeca se cnemanca Ea 59 Playing a Style s Rhythm Channels only 61 Adjusting the Volume Balance Channel Muting 61 Chord ENGENGS vanne 62 Arranging the Style Pattern SECTIONS MAIN A B C D INTRO ENDING BREAK 64 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys SME TOP ene 65 Selecting Intro and Ending Types INTRO ENDING 66 Playing Fill in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections Auto Fill In 66 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style ONE TOUCH SETTING ereeoorneevrneevennevennevennnevene 67 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections OTS Link 68 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 0 20
278. ssnssenssuidnersdoasvecsenstuasstnes 18 30 65 ENTER ae 19 46 ord scccsncoreameiaasaraaeesscgsenteeavenran etaonpcomeniens 45 Entering Chords and Sections Chord Step ceeeeeeees 99 Entering miscellaneous characters Marks rrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnn 45 Entering NUMDETrS EE 45 Entering special character marks umlaut accent Japanese and 9 Lo eeeeeeeeeees 45 Entering Your Name and Language Preference 6 151 EG ET O E E 11 197 OE sossscisaspusctovetonsutenemaisentmeteuececseenteeenceacse 91 EQ LOW Organ Flutes snccrenpenaussavessnaucedensstonntesssasstmerseeeseararse 91 UT 136 OE 159 Example Keyboard Data Luassvesmsmsedaaanne 157 19 EO O err nace 19 40 exit from small pop up windows ssssssssssssssssssssssrrrsssssssesens 40 FN 114 EXTRA TRACKS STYLE button errrrrrrrrrrrrrrrvrvrrnrnnnnn 18 79 Fade In Time Fade Out Time Fade Out Hold Time 148 FADE IN OUT button xenscssicasenscntanseioversrcersteasacesnaneniss 18 65 FELG JE E E EEE EE 71 GP 18 78 AE EEE NE 39 File Folder related Operations srrrrrnnrrrrvnnnnvnvvrrrrnrrnnnnnnnne 41 Files folders in a floppy disk rrrrrrrrrnnrrrrrnnnnnnrvrrrrnrrnnnnnnne 42 TREE ENE ee ee 66 MT 89 107 123 FILTER BRIGHT Sound Creator cccccesceccccceccececescescs 89 FILTER HARMO Sound Creator ccceccscceccecceccecceceeceuces 89 Mr 113 LE NE EE 62 ANGRET ON BASS vred 62 He uren 101
279. t MAIN LAYER or LEFT containing the SOUND voice you wish to edit CREATOR button Mom o WEE o mms A AN CAUTION SONG ded J 128 MATH DIGITAL NewSong Eg STUDIO BAR SOUND CREATOR The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display The settings are lost if the edited part s voice is switched to another voice Important data should be saved to User Drive or floppy disk INTRO EHDING REGISTRATION BAKE 4bar Abar NewBank ANGE MIXING CONSOLE d 3 Edit the voice parameters The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail starting on page 89 Regular Voice and page 91 Organ Flutes Select the desired menu by pressing the NEXT REGULAR VOICE BACK button ORGAN FLUTES PSR 2000 only b AIL AR YO ana Fic P ATOR OR GA Dip Indicates the STAGE2 ORGAN TYPE VIBRATO ONOFF VARIATION OFF parameters available Vintage OFF LOH FREQ 125Hz GAIN 0dB for editing in this ROTARY SP SPEED WIERATO DE HIGH FREA 4 5kHz GAIN 0dB display TEE Slow Gr 3 correspond to the parameters values E shown at the bottom of the display MW BU sl SE enw SLs CIE bu 8 Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice Select or adjust the parameters Select the desired menu Opens the Save Voice display for saving The selected menu is highlighted th
280. tarts as soon as you start playing the S VI button the ea F button H C Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data the keyboard First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard This setting also preserves the previous lead in data letting you record over the original lead in without Determines the Punch Out measure the measure at which Punch In overwrite REG START RHAL KEY OH REG EXD REPLACE ALL PUHCH OUT Ho FIRST erasina it recording stops when we PUNCH OUT AT is Punch In At selected The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure set by the 34 V buttons then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure When this is set to ON you can use the foot pedal 2 to control the punch in and punch out points The current function assignment of the foot pedal is cancelled Press and hold down the foot pedal to record Recording stops when you release the pedal Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts when PUNCH IN AT is selected These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped Punch Out This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped Punch Out At Overwrite recordin
281. ted in Determines the speed of the Echo Tremolo and Trill Type above effects This parameter is only available when Echo Tremolo or Trill is selected in Type above This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts For details see page 144 PSR 2000 1000 O Making Global and Other Important Settings Function About the Harmony Types When a normal Harmony type Standard Duet through Strum is selected Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony D Split point Harmony notes based on the chord and the selected type are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point When Multi Assign is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right hand section of the keyboard to separate parts voices For example if you play two consecutive notes the first is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice When Echo is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo When Tremolo is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo When Trill is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately in time with the currently set tempo About the Harmony Assignments AUTO Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts M
282. term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths in feet The longer the pipe the lower the pitch of the sound Hence the 16 setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component The higher the value of the setting the greater the volume of the corresponding footage Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds Volume VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes The longer the graphic bar the greater the volume Response RESP The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release based on the FOOTAGE controls The higher the value the slower the swell and release Vibrato Speed VIB SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On Off and Vibrato Depth above The MODE control selects between two modes FIRST and EACH In the FIRST mode attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously while the first notes are held any subsequently played notes have no attack applied In the EACH mode attack is applied equally to all notes Attack 4 2 2 3 2 The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice The 4 2 2 3 and 2 controls incr
283. ters are turned on page 143 This is normal and is a result of the PSR 2000 1000 s sampling system This is normal Some voices have a pitch limit which when reached causes this type of pitch shift e Disk save operations take a long time This is normal Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk Certain voices may produce noise depending on the Harmonic Content and or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display page 123 The volume may be turned up too high Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate This may be caused by the effects Try canceling all unnecessary effects especially distortion type effects page 124 Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display page 89 can result in distorted sound Adjust these settings if necessary Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display Mixing Console page 127 PSR 2000 only Both the Main and Layer parts are set to ON and both parts are set to play the same voice Set the Layer part to OFF page 56 or change the voice for each part page 54 PSR 2000 1000 Oo Specifications O available 16 Drum Kits 15 Drum Kits Csao fC wewe S Oanes oero Samdoer E a a Chorus moon 4 sesa mmesmuove Masera CS Preset aus gt peateg 2 Vocal Harmo
284. the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button any whose indicators are green to recall the desired settings REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Valet Jed PSR 2000 1000 Editing Voices Sound Creator The PSR 2000 1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices Once you ve created a voice you can save it as a USER voice for future recall J NOTE e The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song style e Keep in mind that adjust ments made to the param eters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the Original settings of the voice f gt F 1 OR K one OM ES CREN EE wow o ouno N J EIE H HHT 1 STYLE wo R VOICE M O a DIGITAL m ola ol 0 STUDIO N t fre la le lello er SOUND CREATOR sjlelsjje7jef w menne Press the F G or H button to select the Press the Par
285. the desired Multi Pad Bank for editing To record a new Multi Pad from scratch call up the RECORD page in the Multi Pad Creator display and select New Bank by pressing the C NEW BANK button DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CON Cd 4 Record and Edit the Multi Pad For details on the operations for gt Call up the Multi Pad each display refer to the explanations starting on the next page 5 display by pressing the I SAVE button then save the recorded edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page Use the BACK 3 61 Tom Flam 1 sel Tom Flam 3 NEXT buttons z I to select the l Tom Flam 2 sal Tom Flam 4 RECORD or EDIT page Press the EXIT button to close the MULTI PAD display PADI PADZ PAD3 PADA PADI PAb2 PAD3 PAbd OH OH OH OH OH OH OH OH KA GA GA GA fe Sia Ga GA PSR 2000 1000 Creating Multi Pad Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Realtime Recording Record The operations here apply to step 4 on page 118 TOR Tom Flam D a lie Tom Flam 1 s l Tom Flam 3 2 d sel Tom Flam 2 gl Tom Flam 4 HEH Select the desired Multi Pad for recording or editing You can also select it by pressing the MULTI PAD 1 to 4 button sven ses wanwanwanvesdaseansense BEPEAT ss E PADI PAb2 PAD3 PAMA OH OH OH OH KA GA Ga UiA Selects an empty Multi P
286. the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles page 116 This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard page 62 These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard Call up the Style display by pressing the I SAVE button in Assembly page J button then save the recorded edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page Press the EXIT button to close the STYLE CREATOR display PSR 2000 1000 q Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator Realtime Recording Basic You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the F REC CH button and pressing the appropriate 1A V 8A V button Before recording to one of the non rhythm channels BASS PHR 2 make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel You can make other settings see the box Other Parameters in the BASIC page on page 111 after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the EXIT button To call up the REC CHANNEL display again press the F REC CH button When this button is p
287. the previous note range For example the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3 F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts F oOo i 116 PSR 2000 1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator NTT Note Transposition Table This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern Six transposition types are available Bypass No transposition Melody Suitable for melody line transposition Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2 Chord Suitable for chord transposition Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels especially when they contain piano or guitar like chordal parts Bass Suitable for bass line transposition This table is basically similar to the Melody table above but recognizes on bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode Use this primarily for bass lines Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third interval is raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semito
288. ting a ing down one panel voice voice here is the same as that in VOICE MAIN button press a second Aegis page 54 voice button The first Play pag selected voice becomes the EE i T een pre O ME cerave O Mir dd du SONG drd 126 MAIH J NewSong ge Strings tom Fem rene INTRO ENDING REGISTRATION BANK Ein return to the 4bar Abar NewBank 7 LAHGE MAIN display PSR 2000 1000 Voices Left Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard Set the LEFT to 2 Select LEFT with the H button Press the same ON Press this button again to button to call up the VOICE display from which set it to OFF you can select the specific voice you want to play in a left How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE MAIN screen page 54 ag RANS o HINE UPPER o 1 SPLIT fit FOSE OCTAWE FOINT FHe FE SONG d d 128 Ji NewSong ge Strings INTRO EHDING FEGISTRATIOH BAHE 4bar Abar NewBank BALAHGE Press this to return to the MAIN display D NOTE The split point can be freely set to any key on the key board page 138 D NOTE Each part MAIN LAYER and LEFT can have its own volume setting page 61 3 NOTE You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together to create a combi nation layer split To do this set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboa
289. to be applied In other words if 8 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes if 12 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to 8th note triplets Actually changes the timing of the beats specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above to the selected value For example when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 8 Beat and BEAT CONVERTER is set to 12 all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th note triplet timing The 16A and 16B Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 12 Beat are variations on a basic 16th note setting Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of the back beats depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above For example if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd 4th 6th and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel The settings A through E produce different degrees of swing with A being the most subtle and E being the most pronounced Selects a variety of Groove templates to be applied to the selected section The PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats The numbered settings 2 3 4 5 determine which beats are to be affected All beats up to the specified beat but not including the first beat will be played early or delayed for example the 2nd and 3rd beats if
290. tor set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to SONG in MIDI Receive page 147 W Play and control the PSR 2000 1000 from a separate keyboard PSR 2000 1000 158 7 PSR 2000 1000 Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR 2000 1000 and whether or not the PSR 2000 1000 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics you may be able to play back the data without any problem or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back If you run into problems playing back data please refer to the information below Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices including computers Different devices have different systems of storing data therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used This operation is called formatting e There are two types of floppy disks MF2DD double sided double density and MF2HD double sided high density and each type has different formatting systems e PSR 2000 1000 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks e When formatted by the PSR 2000 1000 a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB kilobytes and a 2H
291. tton in order to go back to the Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO lt q p gt buttons previous screen page 50 or the TAP TEMPO button You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo simply tap the TAP TEMPO button twice D NOTE Songs can also be played back continuously Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING display page 137 3 NOTE Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument page 151 is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back Oo PSR 2000 1000 Song Playback D NOTE The accompaniment stops when you stop the song If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song the accompaniment automatically stops How ever for internal songs that use accompaniment styles the accompaniment style is not stopped Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the song s chord data e ACMP button e AUTO FILL IN button Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG START STOP button Select the desired accompaniment style Start the style by
292. tyle Simultaneously changing the Tempo during style playback when selecting another press the AV buttons to move the record The on off setting affects all pages ALL FAVORITE cursor to the first record SEARCH 1 SEARCH 2 J NOTE Records can be selected by using the DATA ENTRY dial and pressing the ENTER button PSR 2000 1000 4 Play the style page 60 I I Searching the Ideal Setups Music Finder Search You can search the record by music title or keywords The results appears in the display 1 Press the I Enter the SEARCH 1 conditions for button or J the search see SEARCH 2 below then OD alke ED button in the start search by gt cme r MUSIC FINDER using START display SEARCH button CH 2 4 3 4 ded 6 8 OTHER SEARGH AREA FAVORITE SEARCHL SEARCH TEHF H Fu Start searching the record The results that satisfy all the conditions appear in the SEARCH page For details about the search settings in this display see below de eh ey Tel fe TRCRCOMUMOMUMUMO m A MUSIC Searches by music or song title Press this button to call up the display for inputting the song title When you enter the song title page 45 the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words E B KEYWORD KEY HORD P Searches by keyboard Press this button to call up the display
293. u RESET Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO lt q p gt buttons or the DATA ENTRY dial Press either the TEMPO lt a The number in the display indicates how many button or the p gt button quarter note beats there are in one minute The range is between 5 and 500 The higher the value the faster the tempo When you change the tempo both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same close the tempo To restore their respective default initial TEMPO display tempo settings press both the TEMPO lt q p gt buttons simultaneously Also refer to the Tempo Indications MAIN display page 51 for more about tempo Press this to PSR 2000 1000 Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Tap Tempo This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style Simply tap the TAP TEMPO button at the desired speed and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping Playback the song or the TAP TEMPO accompaniment style page 59 76 Tap the TAP TEMPO button twice to change the tempo E Tempo Indications MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display as shown below Indicates the default initial tempo setting for the currently selected song unless the tempo has been TRANS UPPER SFLIT changed
294. u adjust the amount of harmony effect that is applied EFFECT TYPE Std Duet PARAHETER Save the changed data page 38 44 EFFEGT TYPE PARAHETER Select a Vocal Harmony type Return to the VOCAL HARMONY A TYPE display EWE Gl ENE BE g P Op Ue Select a Vocal Harmony parameter Adjust the parameter value J NOTE The saved settings can be named page 41 or deleted page 43 in the USER page y Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display D NOTE For details about the Vocal Har mony parameter refer to the PSR 2000 separate Data List Using a Microphone MIC PSR 2000 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone MICROPHONE SETTING Operation 1 Press the MIC 2 Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the BACK NEXT SETTING button and set the parameters button For information on the various parameters and settings and BACK NEXT how to use them refer to the explanations EE below Ww Eno Press the EXIT Con button to return to the am G amp A 3 14dE 3 0 1 previous display Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects OVERALL SETTING The explanations here apply to step 2 above Select the 3BAND EQ Select the NOISE GATE COMPRESSOR Select the VOCAL HARMONY CONTRO
295. ulti This automatically assigns the 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th added harmony notes to different parts voices For example if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the Standard Duet type is selected the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part When the Main part is turned off Harmony is not applied Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part When the Layer part is turned off Harmony is not applied 144 PSR 2000 1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings Function Setting the MIDI Parameters In this section you can make MIDI related settings for the instrument These settings can be stored all together from the USER display for future recall For general information and details about MIDI see What is MIDI page 155 The explanations here apply to step 3 of the procedure on page 133 Preset MIDI Templates Factory Set 1 Select the desired template All Parts Transmit all parts including Main Layer and Left Master KBD The PSR 2000 1000 functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices All Parts mat MIDI Accord KBD amp Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts Main mal Master KBD mal MIDI Accord2 Layer Left mia Song All Transmit channels are set to ma KBD amp Style m
296. undone Set Up TR New Sang SEE ET iaie Te o a a CH 1 GH 2 CH 3 GH H 5 GH amp 6 amp _CH 7 GH 5560056006 Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel H c c Toggles between the two channel displays Channels 1 8 and Channels 9 16 e c To simultaneously set all channels to the same value adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data You can change the initial settings of the song such as voice level and tempo to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls Use these to select the desired edit operation Executes the SET UP operation Once SET UP has been executed the operation cannot be cancelled or undone GT wU 1 OLE PAH FILTER EFFECT TEHPO OC KEYBOARD VOICE O SCORE SETTING CILYRICS LANGUAGE C WIC SETTING Calls up the SONG display from which you can save the edited data Use this to checkmark the selected item Checkmarked items are stored with the song Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song All events with the exception of KEYBOARD VOICE can be recorded only at the beginning of the song Before you select or checkmark any of th
297. ups For details refer to page 68 ONE TOUCH SETTING O O O e Here s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance Use the convenient OTS One Touch Setting Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main section page 68 aq K Quick Guide eeecercececerrereececervreceeereececee eee e eee ece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eo Music Finder Music Finder Reference on page 69 I MUSIC FINDER button 3 Oe bbt If you want to play in a certain song but don t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate the convenient Music Finder can help you out Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PSR 2000 1000 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style Using the Music Finder 1 Press the MUSIC FINDER button MUSIC FINDER 2 Select a record pt ee Press the BACKJ NEXT button to select the desired page of records For this example ALL is selected G0 8Beat Jive 60 shtrPop CrocoTuist ae Black is Black Black Hasic Honan TO sbisco3 RockChatha Blaue It On The Boo Discolhocel HUHBER OF Blue Suede Shoes Rock amp Roll 186 RECORDS Boon Boon Boon Boon Eurolrance TEMPO LOGE ar ar Gar OFF Select the desired D D D lel record UU WUUUUY For this example press the T A V 3
298. used For a major chord press the root key only and a black key to its left For a seventh chord simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes If you want to play minor seventh or minor seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode always press the closest white black key s to the root of the chord FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note allowing you to play on bass chords For example to indicate a C on E chord play a C major chord with E as the lowest note E G C FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered even if you split the notes between your left and right hands for example playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right Al FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGE
299. ve System Files function SE FERRER SYSTEM RESET OPENSSAVE SYSTEM FILES Factory reset dose not reset Lanauase Duner Name LCD contrast Brishtnes s Main Lyric Backsround Restores the MIDI templates to the original E factory settings TEL Video Gut Parameters To Language reset these parameters load System Setur Preset File Owner Name Restores the User Effects ED LCD Brightness page 125 to the original factory settings Restores the Music Finder data to the original factory settings FILES C FOLDERS RESET EXECUTE Deletes all files and folders stored in the User page A al A A A fo 4 6 7 D NOTE All Music Finder records can be stored together as a sin gle file When calling up a stored file a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired A CAUTION All user files amp folders lost when this item is selected Replace g y y y v y y All Music Finder records cur W U rently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with Executes the Factory Reset operation These call up the corresponding Open records of the selected for all items checkmarked above Save displays These let you store the ni Append The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers corresponding data as files to disk for future recall Pr
300. version will only occur for changes in the root note or major minor shifts Step Recording With this method you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually without having to perform them in real time The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109 1926PPE 001 1 0000 LE 001 1 0000 Proa 001 1 0000 Hote ci 96 0000 0020 001 1 0000 Hote C1 001 1 0000 Hote F 1 72 0000 0020 001 1 0000 Hote F 1 O01 1 0360 Hote Fil 001 2 0000 Hote Cl 126 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Hote EE 001 2 0000 Hote Fil 115 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Hote Fil 001 2 0960 Hote ci 72 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Hote ci 001 2 0960 Hote Fil 28 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Hote F 1 001 3 0000 Hote ci 001 3 0000 Hote Fil 74 0000 0020 001 3 0000 Hote F 1 001 3 0960 Note F 1 30 0000 0020 001 3 0960 Hote F 1 C 0014 0000 Hote Cl 126 0000 0020 001 4 0000 Hote cH BAR BEAT GLK BAR BEAT GLK 001 1 0000 patrene DET ok 001 1 0000 80 J6 T2 3d 136 115 72 28 JE Td 30 126 STYLE CREATOR HeartBeat STEP RECORD 0000 0070 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 0000 002 The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs page 96 with the exception of the points described below You can also edit each event from the Edit page and the editing process the same as in editing songs page 105 e In song recording the end mark position can be chan
301. wn eight items at a time PSR 2000 1000 O Execute the settings by Creating Accompaniment Styles Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles which can then be used for auto accompaniment just as with the preset styles f STYLE CONTROL an NG ACMP BREAK INTRO O O O O l O Er ae oe O SDF o START START STOP ve OFILL IN O LINK gt Heen 2 eu AS lelle e About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts or channels that make up each section of an accompaniment style To create an accompaniment style record patterns to Section the various channels one by one for each of the sections you want to create MA MAINA D RHYTHM 1 RHYTHM 2 M Realtime Recording page 110 FILLINA D ee You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the BREAK PHRASE 1 PHRASE 2 keyboard in real time However you don t have to record every part yourself you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the Bad style you want then add or replace parts in that style as n
302. y disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open Save display only the files which can be handled in that Open Save display will appear even though a folder in a floppy disk can contain different kinds of files In the case of a folder cut and paste operation for floppy disk an entire folder can be cut however only the specific files which can be handled in the current Open Save display will be pasted Basic Operations Organizing Your Data Copying Files Folders You can also copy files and folders as desired for organizing your data Any file folder in the PRESET USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied using the copy and paste operation described below D NOTE Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only 1 Press the 3V COPY button page 38 COPY Select files folders EM The COPY display appears ALL Ga GT J NOTE This operation cannot be used to directly copy a file folder from one floppy disk to another If you want to do this copy and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the User page then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page Select the desired file folder Select the appropriate file folder and press the 7W OK button The currently selected file folder is highlighted To select another file folder press one of the A J buttons Several files folders can be se
303. y one of the drum kits is used Channels Parts default settings Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 Available parts Voice MAIN LAYER LEFT Multi Pad Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI Bass The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style such as acoustic bass synth bass and others Chord This is the rhythmic chord backing commonly used with piano or guitar voices Pad This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings organ and choir Phrase This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios E When creating a new song O REC O START STOP REW FF J Aaa LNB SYNC START A E When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance 1 Select the desired song page 76 78 Select the desired channel for recording set it to REC simultaneously
304. yboard irrespective of the split point setting If desired select a different fingering mode page 62 q PSR 2000 1000 Troubleshooting The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than Equal changing the tuning system of the keyboard Make sure Equal is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page page 135 e Some channels do not properly play back Make sure that playback of the relevant channel s is turned on page 78 when playing back song data The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone e The Harmony function does not operate e When a voice is changed the previously selected effect is changed e Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch If you experience distorted or out of tune sound from the Vocal Harmony feature your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds other than your voice the Auto Accompaniment sound from the PSR 2000 1000 for example In particular bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature PSR 2000 only Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature PSR 2000 only The microphone input signal and Vocal Harmony sound PSR 2000 only cannot be recorded MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals even when MI
305. you play the keyboard You can also start recording by pressing the SONG STYLE START STOP button Recording can also be started by Il pressing down the foot pedal if the song start stop function is properly assigned to the pedal page 139 wa ilo stop recording press the RECORD button again Ein Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal if the song start stop function is properly assigned to the pedal page 139 E Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded return the song to the beginning by using the TOP button and press the SONG START STOP button Playback stops automatically at the end of the song and returns to the beginning of the song You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR 1 16 displays page 105 Press the 6V button from the Open Save display for Song to store the recorded data page 38 44 D NOTE If the LAYER or LEFT but ton is on before pressing the REC button the correspond ing Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to dif ferent channels SKA The performance of track 1 2 is recorded to the channel specified in the SONG SET TING display page 137 D NOTE You can overdub a second right hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the first right hand performance including the layer voices on Track 1 To do this set the LEFT button to OFF and repeat ste

Kodak DX6440 Digital Camera User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents